البروجكتر التفاعلي

‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺼﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺘﺼﻔﺢ ﺍﻟﻮﻳﺐ ‪151‬‬ ‫• \"ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ‪ -‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ \"‪ \"\"ECO‬ﺻـ‪177‬‬ ‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻷﻳﻘﻮﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ‪h.‬‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬ ‫‪A‬‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﻣﻨﻔﺬ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬ ‫‪B‬‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺼﺎﺩﺭ ﻣﻨﻔﺬ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻭ‪HDMI‬‬ ‫‪C‬‬ ‫‪D‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ‬ ‫‪E‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺯﺭ ﻛﺘﻢ ﺻﻮﺕ ‪A/V‬‬ ‫‪F‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺃﺯﺭﺍﺭ ‪) Page Up‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ( ﻭ‪) Page Down‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ﻷﺳﻔﻞ(‬ ‫‪G‬‬ ‫‪H‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺩﺭ‬ ‫‪I‬‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‬ ‫‪J‬‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ‪ USB‬ﺃﻭ ‪USB Display‬‬ ‫‪K‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺃﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻴﺢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺭﻣﺰ ‪QR‬‬ ‫‪ y‬ﺍﺭﺗﺒﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺻﻠﺔ‬ ‫• \"ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ‪ -‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ\" ﺻـ‪171‬‬

‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺒﻴﻬﺎﺕ ﺑﺎﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ‪152‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻣﺠﺎﻝ ‪) Address‬ﺍﻟﻌﻨﻮﺍﻥ(‪ ،‬ﻭﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺒﻴﻬﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﺩ ﺍﺳﺘﻼﻣﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻭﻛﺮﺭ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ ﺇﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻣﺸﻜﻠﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻭﺿﻌﻴﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ ECO‬ﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﻼﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺒﻴﻪ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ‬ ‫ﺫﻟﻚ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﻭﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺜﻼﺛﺔ‪i.‬‬ ‫ﺣﺘﻰ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻌﻴﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻌﺪﺍﺩ )ﻋﻨﺪ ﻓﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ(‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺼﻞ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ ﺣﺘﻰ ‪ 32‬ﺭﻣﺰًﺍ ﺃﺑﺠﺪﻳًﺎ ﺭﻗﻤ ًﻴﺎ‪a.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ]‪ [Menu‬ﻓﻲ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺃﻭ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‪a.‬‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻬﺎﺀ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻛﺘﻤﻞ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻭﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺤﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻟﺤﻔﻆ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪b.[Enter‬‬ ‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪c.[Enter‬‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻟﺨﺮﻭﺝ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ‪j.‬‬ ‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺇﺷﻌﺎﺭ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‪d.[Enter‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﻣﺸﻜﻠﺔ ﺧﻄﻴﺮﺓ ﺗﺴﺒﺐ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﻼﻡ ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ ﺇﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ‪a.‬‬ ‫‪ y‬ﺍﺭﺗﺒﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺻﻠﺔ‬ ‫• \"ﺭﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺒﻴﻪ ﺑﺎﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ\" ﺻـ‪152‬‬ ‫• \"ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ‪ -‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ \"‪ \"\"ECO‬ﺻـ‪177‬‬ ‫ﺭﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺒﻴﻪ ﺑﺎﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ‬ ‫ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻬﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻟﺘﻠﻘﻲ‬ ‫ُﻣﺴﺒﻘًﺎ‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪﻙ‬ ‫ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﻣﺸﻜﻠﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺼﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‪ ،‬ﻣﻊ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ‬ ‫ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺑﺮﻳﺪ ﺇﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ ﺗﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪:‬‬ ‫ﻓﺴﺘﺘﻠﻘﻰ‬ ‫• ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺤﻘﻞ ﻣﻦ ﻛﻌﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺑﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺳﻞ‬ ‫• ‪ Epson Projector‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﻮﻉ‬ ‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺇﺧﻄﺎﺭ ﺑﺎﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪e.‬‬ ‫• ﺍﺳﻢ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻜﻠﺔ‬ ‫ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ‪ IP‬ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﻠﻘﻢ ‪f.SMTP‬‬ ‫• ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ‪ IP‬ﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺄﺛﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻜﻠﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﺠﻨﺐ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﻭﻳﻦ‪ 127.x.x.x :‬ﺃﻭ ‪ 224.0.0.0‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪) 255.255.255.255‬ﺣﻴﺚ‪a‬‬ ‫ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ‪ x‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻳﺒﺪﺃ ﻣﻦ ‪ 0‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪.(255‬‬ ‫• ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺗﻔﺼﻴﻠﻴﺔ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻜﻠﺔ‬ ‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺭﻗﻢ ﻟﻤﻠﻘﻢ ‪ SMTP‬ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻔﺬ‪ ،‬ﻣﻦ ‪ 1‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪) 65535‬ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ ﻫﻮ ‪g.(25‬‬ ‫ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻴﻪ ﺑﺎﻋﺘﺒﺎﺭﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺳﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺤﻘﻞ ﻣﻦ‪h.‬‬

‫‪153‬‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﻗﺒﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪SNMP‬‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻬﺎﺀ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻛﺘﻤﻞ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻭﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺤﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻟﺤﻔﻆ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﻳﺴﺘﻄﻴﻊ ﻣﺴﺆﻭﻟﻮ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪) SNMP‬ﺑﺮﻭﺗﻮﻛﻮﻝ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺴﻴﻄﺔ( ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﻣﻤﺎ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻟﺨﺮﻭﺝ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ‪h.‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜّﻨﻬﻢ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺮﺍﻗﺒﺔ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪ ،‬ﻭﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﻟﻬﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﻠﻤﺮﺍﻗﺒﺔ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪.SNMP‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ]‪ [Menu‬ﻓﻲ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺃﻭ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‪a.‬‬ ‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪b.[Enter‬‬ ‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪c.[Enter‬‬ ‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺇﺷﻌﺎﺭ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‪d.[Enter‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ‪ SNMP‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪e.‬‬ ‫ﺣﻘﻞ‪f‬‬ ‫‪255‬‬ ‫‪IP‬‬ ‫ﻟﻜﻞ‬ ‫ﺇﻟﻰ‬ ‫‪0‬‬ ‫ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣًﺎ‬ ‫‪SNMP‬‬ ‫ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻬﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻻﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺎﻭﻳﻦ‬ ‫ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﺛﻨﻴﻦ‬ ‫ﺇﻟﻰ‬ ‫ﻳﺼﻞ‬ ‫ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﻣﺎ‬ ‫ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﻭﻳﻦ‪ 127.x.x.x :‬ﺃﻭ ‪ 224.0.0.0‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪) 255.255.255.255‬ﺣﻴﺚ‬ ‫‪a‬‬ ‫ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ‪ x‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺭﻗﻢ ﻳﺒﺪﺃ ﻣﻦ ‪ 0‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ .(255‬ﻳﺪﻋﻢ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻋﻤﻴﻞ ‪ ،SNMP‬ﺍﻹﺻﺪﺍﺭ ‪1‬‬ ‫)‪.(SNMPv1‬‬ ‫ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻟﺒﺮﻭﺗﻮﻛﻮﻝ ‪ SNMP‬ﺑﻄﻮﻝ ﻳﺼﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ 32‬ﺣﺮﻓًﺎ ﺃﺑﺠﺪ ًﻳﺎ ﺭﻗﻤ ًﻴﺎ‪g.‬‬

‫‪154‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺃﻭﺍﻣﺮ ‪ESC/VP21‬‬ ‫ﺍﻷﻣﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺼﺮ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪.ESC/VP21‬‬ ‫‪ y‬ﺍﺭﺗﺒﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺻﻠﺔ‬ ‫‪SOURCE 1F‬‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ‪1‬‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ‬ ‫‪SOURCE 11‬‬ ‫• \"ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺃﻭﺍﻣﺮ ‪ \"ESC/VP21‬ﺻـ‪154‬‬ ‫‪SOURCE 14‬‬ ‫‪RGB‬‬ ‫• \"ﺗﺼﻤﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺒﻼﺕ\" ﺻـ‪154‬‬ ‫‪SOURCE 2F‬‬ ‫‪SOURCE 21‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻜﻮﻥ‬ ‫‪SOURCE 24‬‬ ‫‪SOURCE 30‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ‪ 2‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬ ‫‪SOURCE A0‬‬ ‫‪SOURCE C0‬‬ ‫‪RGB‬‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺃﻭﺍﻣﺮ ‪ESC/VP21‬‬ ‫‪SOURCE 41‬‬ ‫‪SOURCE 51‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻜﻮﻥ‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻨﻘﻞ ﺃﻣﺮ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻭﻳﺪﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﺣﻤﺎﺀ‪ .‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺘﻢ‬ ‫‪SOURCE 52‬‬ ‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪ ،‬ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺘﻴﻦ \"‪.(3Ah) \":‬‬ ‫‪SOURCE 53‬‬ ‫‪HDMI1/MHL‬‬ ‫‪MUTE ON‬‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻷﻭﺍﻣﺮ‪ ،‬ﻳﻨﻔﺬ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﻭﻳﻌﻴﺪ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻗﻴﻢ \"‪ \":‬ﺛﻢ ﻳﻘﺒﻞ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫‪MUTE OFF‬‬ ‫‪HDMI2‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺇﻧﻬﺎﺀ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﺍﻟﺠﺎﺭﻱ ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺠﺘﻪ ﺑﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺧﻂﺃ ﻭﺗﺘﻢ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻗﻴﻢ \"‪.\":‬‬ ‫‪HDMI3‬‬ ‫ﺗﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﺍﻷﻭﺍﻣﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪:‬‬ ‫ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬ ‫‪USB Display‬‬ ‫ﺍﻷﻣﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺼﺮ‬ ‫‪PWR ON‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪/‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫‪USB‬‬ ‫‪PWR OFF‬‬ ‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫‪LAN‬‬ ‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪/‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﻛﺘﻢ ﺻﻮﺕ ‪A/V‬‬ ‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺃﺿﻒ ﻛﻮﺩ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﻟﺴﻄﺮ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ )‪ (CR) (0Dh‬ﻓﻲ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺔ ﻛﻞ ﺃﻣﺮ ﺛﻢ ﺃﺭﺳﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﺮﺟﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺍﺻﻞ ﻣﻊ ‪ Epson‬ﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺼﻤﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺒﻼﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﻠﺴﻠﻲ‬ ‫• ﺷﻜﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻮ ﱢﺻﻞ‪ D-Sub :‬ﺫﻭ ‪ 9‬ﺩﺑﺎﺑﻴﺲ )ﺫﻛﺮ(‬ ‫• ﺍﺳﻢ ﻣﻨﻔﺬ ﺩﺧﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪RS-232C :‬‬ ‫• ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻜﺒﻞ‪ :‬ﻛﺒﻞ ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻞ )ﺑﻼ ﻣﻮﺩﻡ(‬

‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺃﻭﺍﻣﺮ ‪155 ESC/VP21‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﻜﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺿﻴﺤﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‪ ،‬ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺟﺎﻧﺐ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﺑﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺟﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻴﻦ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﺗﺄﺭﻳﺾ ﺳﻠﻚ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ‬ ‫‪GND‬‬ ‫‪TD‬‬ ‫ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‬ ‫‪RD‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺑﺮﻭﺗﻮﻛﻮﻝ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻻﺕ‬ ‫• ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ ﻟﻤﻌﺪﻝ ﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‪ 9600 :‬ﺑﺖ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ‬ ‫• ﻃﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‪ 8 :‬ﺑﺖ‬ ‫• ﺍﻟﺘﻤﺎﺛﻞ‪ :‬ﺑﺪﻭﻥ‬ ‫• ﺑﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻗﻒ‪ 1 :‬ﺑﺖ‬ ‫• ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺪﻓﻖ‪ :‬ﺑﺪﻭﻥ‬

‫ﺩﻋﻢ ‪156 PJLink‬‬ ‫‪EPSON‬‬ ‫ﺗﻢ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪ PJLink‬ﻣﻦ ِﻗﺒﻞ ‪) JBMIA‬ﺍﻟﺠﻤﻌﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﺎﺑﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻟﺼﻨﺎﻋﺔ ﺃﻧﻈﻤﺔ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻭﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻛﺎﺕ( ﻛﺒﺮﻭﺗﻮﻛﻮﻝ‬ ‫• ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﺍﺯ ﻟـ \"ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻔﺴﺎﺭ ﻋﻦ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ\"‬ ‫ﻗﻴﺎﺳﻲ ﻟﻠﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻛﺠﺰﺀ ﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﻮﺩﻫﺎ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﻣﻘﺎﻳﻴﺲ ﻟﺒﺮﻭﺗﻮﻛﻮﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫• ‪EPSON 695Wi/695WT‬‬ ‫ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬ ‫• ‪EPSON 685Wi/685WT‬‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻣﻊ ﻣﻌﻴﺎﺭ ‪ PJLink Class2‬ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻢ ﻭﺿﻌﻪ ﻣﻦ ِﻗﺒﻞ ‪.JBMIA‬‬ ‫• ‪EPSON 680Wi‬‬ ‫ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻔﺬ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺑﺤﺚ ‪ PJLink‬ﻫﻮ ‪.(UDP) 4352‬‬ ‫• ‪EPSON 675Wi‬‬ ‫ﻳﺠﺐ ﺇﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺇﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪.PJLink‬‬ ‫• ‪EPSON 685W‬‬ ‫• ‪EPSON 675W‬‬ ‫ﻓﻬﻮ ﻳﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻷﻭﺍﻣﺮ ﻣﺎ ﻋﺪﺍ ﺍﻷﻭﺍﻣﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ‪ ،PJLink Class2‬ﻭﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﻛﻴﺪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻟﻤﻌﻴﺎﺭ ‪.PJLink‬‬ ‫• ‪EPSON 680‬‬ ‫• ‪EPSON 670‬‬ ‫‪http://pjlink.jbmia.or.jp/english/‬‬ ‫• ﺍﻷﻭﺍﻣﺮ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ‬ ‫ﺃﻣﺮ ‪PJLink‬‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‬ ‫‪AVMT 11‬‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫‪AVMT 21‬‬ ‫ﺭﻗﻢ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻞ‬ ‫• ﻣﻨﺎﻓﺬ ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻞ ﻭﺭﻗﻢ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﻇﺮ‬ ‫‪11‬‬ ‫‪12‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﻢ ﻣﻨﻔﺬ ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻞ‬ ‫‪21‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ‪1‬‬ ‫‪32‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ‪2‬‬ ‫‪33‬‬ ‫‪Video‬‬ ‫‪36‬‬ ‫‪41‬‬ ‫‪HDMI1/MHL‬‬ ‫‪52‬‬ ‫‪HDMI2‬‬ ‫‪53‬‬ ‫‪HDMI3‬‬ ‫‪USB‬‬ ‫‪LAN‬‬ ‫‪USB Display‬‬ ‫• ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻨﱢﻊ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ \"ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻔﺴﺎﺭ ﻋﻦ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻨﱢﻊ\"‬

‫ﺩﻋﻢ ‪157 Crestron RoomView‬‬ ‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪d.[Enter‬‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻴﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﻗﺒﺔ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪ Crestron RoomView‬ﻭﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺗﺤﻜﻢ‪ ،‬ﻓﻴﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﻟﻼﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ‪ .‬ﺗﺘﻴﺢ ‪ Crestron RoomView‬ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻭﻣﺮﺍﻗﺒﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺘﺼﻔﺢ ﻭﻳﺐ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ‪ Crestron RoomView‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻟﻠﺴﻤﺎﺡ ﺑﺎﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪e.‬‬ ‫• ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻴﺰﺓ ﺗﺤﻜﻢ ‪ Web‬ﻣﻦ ‪ Epson‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﻜ ﱢﻮﻥ ﺍﻹﺿﺎﻓﻲ ‪Message Broadcasting‬‬ ‫‪a‬‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻬﺎﺀ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻛﺘﻤﻞ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻭﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺤﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻟﺤﻔﻆ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪ EasyMP Monitor‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪.Crestron RoomView‬‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻟﺨﺮﻭﺝ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ‪f.‬‬ ‫• ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻭﺿﻌﻴﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ ECO‬ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﺃﻭﻗﻒ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺛﻢ ﺃﻋﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻪ ﻟﺘﻤﻜﻴﻦ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪g.‬‬ ‫ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻌﻴﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻌﺪﺍﺩ )ﻋﻨﺪ ﻓﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ(‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺼﻞ ﺑﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪Crestron RoomView‬‬ ‫ﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ‪ ،Crestron RoomView‬ﺗﻔﻀﻞ ﺑﺰﻳﺎﺭﺓ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ‪ Crestron‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﻳﺐ‪.‬‬ ‫‪http://www.crestron.com‬‬ ‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪ ،Crestron RoomView‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻭﻣﺮﺍﻗﺒﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺘﺼﻔﺢ‬ ‫ﻭﻳﺐ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﻤﺮﺍﻗﺒﺔ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪ Crestron RoomView Express‬ﺃﻭ ‪Crestron‬‬ ‫‪ RoomView Server Edition‬ﻣﻦ ‪ .Creston‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺍﺻﻞ ﻣﻊ ﻣﻜﺘﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﻭﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺭﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﻮﺍﺭﺊ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﺠﺐ ﺑﺪﺀ ﻣﺘﺼﻔﺢ ﺍﻟﻮﻳﺐ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‪a.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻔﻀﻞ ﺑﺰﻳﺎﺭﺓ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﻮﻳﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ ﻟﻼﻃﻼﻉ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻛﺘﺐ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ‪ IP‬ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﻣﺮﺑﻊ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺼﻔﺢ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ‪Enter‬‬ ‫‪http://www.crestron.com/getroomview‬‬ ‫ﻳﺸﺮﺡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺘﺼﻔﺢ ﺍﻟﻮﻳﺐ‪.‬‬ ‫)ﺩﺧﻮﻝ( ‪b.‬‬ ‫‪ y‬ﺍﺭﺗﺒﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺻﻠﺔ‬ ‫• \"ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺩﻋﻢ ‪ \"Crestron RoomView‬ﺻـ‪157‬‬ ‫• \"ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺼﻞ ﺑﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪ \"Crestron RoomView‬ﺻـ‪157‬‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺩﻋﻢ ‪Crestron RoomView‬‬ ‫ﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﻠﻤﺮﺍﻗﺒﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ‪ ،Crestron RoomView‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻭﺟﻬﺎﺯ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﻣﺘﻘﺪﻡ ﻟﻼﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ]‪ [Menu‬ﻓﻲ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺃﻭ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‪a.‬‬ ‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪b.[Enter‬‬ ‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪c.[Enter‬‬

‫‪158‬‬ ‫ﺩﻋﻢ ‪Crestron RoomView‬‬ ‫ﻧﺎﻓﺬﺓ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪Crestron RoomView‬‬ ‫ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺗﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻧﺎﻓﺬﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻭﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪Power‬‬ ‫‪A‬‬ ‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻴﻪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺑﻊ ‪ .Sources List‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﺮ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺣﺔ‪c‬‬ ‫‪B‬‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺯﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺴﻬﻢ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺑﻊ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫‪+Vol-/Vol‬‬ ‫‪C‬‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﻇﺮﺓ ﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‪d‬‬ ‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻬﻤﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫‪A/V Mute‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﺮ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺠﺰﺀ ﺍﻟﺴﻔﻠﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ‪ .‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻣﺼﺎﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻞ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﻓﻲ ‪ ،Sources List‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﻨﺎﻇﺮﺓ ﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻓﻲ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪:‬‬ ‫‪a‬‬ ‫ﻓﻮﻕ )‪ (a‬ﺃﻭ )‪ (b‬ﻟﻠﺘﻤﺮﻳﺮ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻭ ﻷﺳﻔﻞ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺩﺧﻞ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﻕ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ‪ OK‬ﻧﻔﺲ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‪[Enter‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺪﺭ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﺰﻡ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪Menu.‬‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻣﺆﻗ ًﺘﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻟﻐﺎﺀ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻓﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫‪Freeze‬‬ ‫ﻳﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﻭﺕ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺀ ﻭﺍﻟﻈﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫‪Contrast‬‬ ‫ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻋﻦ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ‪e.Info‬‬ ‫ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻭ‪ Crestron‬ﻭﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻭﺭ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ‪ ،Tools‬ﻭﺣﺪﺩ‪f‬‬ ‫ﻳﻀﺒﻂ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫‪Brightness‬‬ ‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﺛﻢ ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ‪.Send‬‬ ‫ﻳﻀﺒﻂ ﺗﺸﺒﻊ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫‪Color‬‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻬﺎﺀ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ‪ Exit‬ﻟﻠﺨﺮﻭﺝ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‪g.‬‬ ‫ﻳﻀﺒﻂ ﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫‪Sharpness‬‬ ‫‪ y‬ﺍﺭﺗﺒﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺻﻠﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪ .‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺃﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻷﺳﻬﻢ‬ ‫‪Zoom‬‬ ‫• \"ﻧﺎﻓﺬﺓ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪ \"Crestron RoomView‬ﺻـ‪158‬‬ ‫ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﻜﺒﺮﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫• \"ﻧﺎﻓﺬﺓ ‪ \"Crestron RoomView Tools‬ﺻـ‪159‬‬

‫‪159‬‬ ‫ﺩﻋﻢ ‪Crestron RoomView‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺼﻠﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﻭﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻟﻴًﺎ‬ ‫ﺑﻴﻦ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺼﻞ‬ ‫ﺃﺑﺎﺩﻟﺧﺸﺒﻞﻜﺍﺔﺳ)ﻤًﺎﺣﻟﺘﻠﺘﻰﻤﻴﻴ‪6‬ﺰ‪1‬‬ ‫‪Projector Name B‬‬ ‫ﻳﻨﻔﺬ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﻧﻔﺴﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻨﻔﺬﻫﺎ ﺃﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻷﺳﻬﻢ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺃﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻷﺳﻬﻢ‬ ‫‪D‬‬ ‫ﺣﺮ ًﻓﺎ ﺃﺑﺠﺪ ًﻳﺎ ﺭﻗﻤ ًﻴﺎ(‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﻨﻔﺬ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﺎﻡ ﻧﻔﺴﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻨﻔﺬﻫﺎ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‪ [Enter‬ﻓﻲ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪OK‬‬ ‫ﺃﺑﺠﺪ ًﻳﺎ‬ ‫ﺣﺮ ًﻓﺎ‬ ‫‪32‬‬ ‫)ﺣﺘﻰ‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻟ ًﻴﺎ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺼﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﺟﻬﺎﺯ‬ ‫ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﻢ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ‬ ‫ﺃﺩﺧﻞ‬ ‫‪Location‬‬ ‫ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻭﻳﻐﻠﻘﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫‪Menu‬‬ ‫ﻭﺭﻣ ًﺰﺍ(‪.‬‬ ‫ﺭﻗﻤ ًﻴﺎ‬ ‫‪Auto‬‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻴﺢ ﺇﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺗﺤﺴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﻣﺘﺎﺑﻌﺔﻭ ﺗﺰﺍﻣﻨﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﻊ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﺳﻢ ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ )ﺣﺘﻰ ‪ 32‬ﺣﺮ ًﻓﺎ ﺃﺑﺠﺪﻳًﺎ ﺭﻗﻤ ًﻴﺎ ﻭﺭﻣ ًﺰﺍ(‪.‬‬ ‫‪Assigned To‬‬ ‫ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ‪ RGB‬ﺗﻨﺎﻇﺮﻳﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻨﻔﺬ ‪ Computer1‬ﺃﻭ‬ ‫‪DHCP‬‬ ‫‪.Computer2‬‬ ‫ﺣﺪﺩﻩ ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪ .DHCP‬ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ‪ IP‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ‪ DHCP‬ﻣﻤﻜ ًﻨﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﻐﻴﺮ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺮﺳﻞ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫‪IP Address‬‬ ‫ﻳﻨﻔﺬ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‪ [Esc‬ﻓﻲ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ‪ IP‬ﻟﻠﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺻﻞ ﺣﺎﻟ ًﻴﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫‪Subnet Mask‬‬ ‫‪Search‬‬ ‫‪E‬‬ ‫ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﻗﻨﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ ﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺻﻞ ﺣﺎﻟ ًﻴﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫‪Default Gateway‬‬ ‫ﻳﻣﻨﻌﻪﺮ ﺑﺎﺽﺳﺇﺘﻃﺨﺎﺭﺪﺍﻡﻣﻜ‪s‬ﺘ‪s‬ﺐ‪ e‬ﺍ‪r‬ﻟﻤ‪xp‬ﺴﺎﻋ‪E‬ﺪﺓ‪ُew.‬ﻳ‪i‬ﺴﺘ‪V‬ﺨﺪ‪m‬ﻡ‪o‬ﻹ‪o‬ﺭﺳ‪R‬ﺎﻝ‪n‬ﺭ‪o‬ﺳﺎ‪r‬ﺋ‪t‬ﻞ‪ s‬ﺇ‪e‬ﻟ‪r‬ﻰ‪C‬ﺍﻟ‪.‬ﻤﺴﺆﻭﻝ ﻭﺍﺳﺘﻼﻡ ﺭﺳﺎﺋﻞ‬ ‫‪Esc‬‬ ‫ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺻﻞ ﺣﺎﻟ ًﻴﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻮﺍﺑﺔ ﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺻﻞ ﺣﺎﻟ ًﻴﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫‪Send‬‬ ‫ﻳﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺻﻞ ﺣﺎﻟﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫‪Contact IT Help‬‬ ‫ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻗﻪ ﻟﺘﺄﻛﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻟﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬ ‫‪Enabled (Admin‬‬ ‫‪Info‬‬ ‫ﺣﺪﺩﻩ ﻟﻄﻠﺐ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﻣﺮﻭﺭ ﻟﻔﺘﺢ ﻧﺎﻓﺬﺓ ‪.Tools‬‬ ‫‪(Password‬‬ ‫‪C‬‬ ‫‪Tools‬‬ ‫‪New Password‬‬ ‫ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻭﺭ ﻟﻔﺘﺢ ﻧﺎﻓﺬﺓ ‪) Tools‬ﺣﺘﻰ ‪26‬‬ ‫ﺣﺮﻓًﺎ ﺃﺑﺠﺪ ًﻳﺎ ﺭﻗﻤﻴًﺎ(‪.‬‬ ‫‪Confirm‬‬ ‫ﻧﺎﻓﺬﺓ ‪Crestron RoomView Tools‬‬ ‫ﺗﺘﻴﺢ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻓﻲ ﻧﺎﻓﺬﺓ ‪ Tools‬ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﻣﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻭﺭ ﻧﻔﺴﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺃﺩﺧﻠﺘﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ‪ .New Password‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﻛﻠﻤﺘﺎ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻭﺭ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺘﻴﻦ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺧﻂﺃ‪.‬‬ ‫‪Send‬‬ ‫‪D‬‬ ‫‪Enabled (User‬‬ ‫ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻗﻪ ﻟﺘﺄﻛﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻟﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.Admin Password‬‬ ‫ﺣﺪﺩﻩ ﻟﻄﻠﺐ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﻣﺮﻭﺭ ﻟﻔﺘﺢ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫‪(Password‬‬ ‫‪New Password‬‬ ‫ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻭﺭ ﻟﻔﺘﺢ ﻧﺎﻓﺬﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ )ﺣﺘﻰ ‪26‬‬ ‫ﺣﺮ ًﻓﺎ ﺃﺑﺠﺪ ًﻳﺎ ﺭﻗﻤﻴًﺎ(‪.‬‬ ‫‪Confirm‬‬ ‫ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻭﺭ ﻧﻔﺴﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺃﺩﺧﻠﺘﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ‪ .New Password‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﻛﻠﻤﺘﺎ‬ ‫‪Send‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻭﺭ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺘﻴﻦ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺧﻂﺃ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻗﻪ ﻟﺘﺄﻛﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻟﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.User Password‬‬ ‫‪ A‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻟﻮﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺗﺤﻜﻢ ‪.Crestron‬‬

‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻷﻗﺴﺎﻡ ﻟﻠﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻭﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺗﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ y‬ﺍﺭﺗﺒﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺻﻠﺔ‬ ‫• \"ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻗﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ\" ﺻـ‪161‬‬ ‫• \"ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ\" ﺻـ‪162‬‬ ‫• \"ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ‪ -‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ \"ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ\"\" ﺻـ‪163‬‬ ‫• \"ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ‪ -‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ \"ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ\"\" ﺻـ‪164‬‬ ‫• \"ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺳﻤﺔ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ‪ -‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ \"ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ\"\" ﺻـ‪165‬‬ ‫• \"ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ‪ -‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ \"ﻣﻤﺘﺪ\"\" ﺻـ‪167‬‬ ‫• \"ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ‪ -‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ\" ﺻـ‪171‬‬ ‫• \"ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ‪ -‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ \"‪ \"\"ECO‬ﺻـ‪177‬‬ ‫• \"ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻋﻦ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ‪ -‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ \"ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ\"\" ﺻـ‪179‬‬ ‫• \"ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ‪ -‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ\" ﺻـ‪181‬‬ ‫• \"ﻧﺴﺦ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ )ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺪﻓﻌﻲ(\" ﺻـ‪182‬‬

‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻗﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ‪161‬‬ ‫ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪c.[Enter‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻗﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﻋﻤﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺳﻬﻢ ﺍﻻﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻭ ﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﻟﻠﺘﻨﻘﻞ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪d.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻏ ّﻴﺮ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﺭﺟﺔ ﺃﺳﻔﻞ ﺷﺎﺷﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ‪e.‬‬ ‫ﻹﺭﺟﺎﻉ ﻛﻞ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﻴﻤﻬﺎ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ‪f.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ]‪ [Menu‬ﻓﻲ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺃﻭ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‪a.‬‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻬﺎﺀ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺇﺣﺪﻯ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪g.[Esc‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ [Menu‬ﺃﻭ ]‪ [Esc‬ﻟﻠﺨﺮﻭﺝ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ‪h.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺳﻬﻢ ﺍﻻﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻭ ﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﻟﻠﺘﻨﻘﻞ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﺭﺟﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﻭﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪b‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻜﻞ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻴﻦ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﻓﺮﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ‪a.‬‬

‫‪162‬‬ ‫ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﺟﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺃﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺃﻭ ﺣﺮﻭﻑ‪.‬‬ ‫‪0123456789‬‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺣﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﻬﺠﺎﺋﻴﺔ‬ ‫‪ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXY‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺃﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻷﺳﻬﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺃﻭ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻟﺘﻤﻴﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ‪a‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺮﻣﻮﺯ‬ ‫ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻟﻪ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ]‪.[Enter‬‬ ‫‪Z‬‬ ‫‪abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz‬‬ ‫!\"‪[\\]@?<=>;:/.-,+*()'&%$#‬‬ ‫^_`}|{~‬ ‫ﺗﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻭﻑ ﻣﻦ ﻛﺒﻴﺮﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺻﻐﻴﺮﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﻜﺲ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺗﺤﺪﺩ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ‪ .CAPS‬ﺗﺼﺒﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﻮﺯ‪a‬‬ ‫ﻣﺤﺎﻃﺔ ﺑﺈﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺗﺤﺪﺩ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ‪.SYM1/2‬‬ ‫ﺣﺪﺩ ‪ Finish‬ﻣﻦ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ ﻟﺘﺄﻛﻴﺪ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻻﺕ‪ .‬ﺣﺪﺩ ‪ Cancel‬ﻹﻟﻐﺎﺀ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ‪b.‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ﻣﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺘﺼﻔﺢ ﺍﻟﻮﻳﺐ ﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ‬ ‫‪a‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﻮﺯ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‪ ,‬ﻭﻟﺬﻟﻚ ﻳﺠﺐ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺘﺼﻔﺢ ﺍﻟﻮﻳﺐ ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ y‬ﺍﺭﺗﺒﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺻﻠﺔ‬ ‫\"\"ﺍﺍﻟﻟﻨﺘﺤﺺﻜ ﺍﻢﻟ ُﻤﻓﺘﺎﻲﺡﺟﺑﺎﻬﺎﺳﺯﺘ ﺍﺨﻟﺪﻌﺍﺮﻡ ﻟﺽﻮﺍﻟﺣﻤﺔﺘﺍﻟﺼﻤﻞﻔﺎﺑﺗﺎﻴﻟﺢﺸﺒﺍﻟﻜﻤﺔﻌﺑﺮﺎﻭﺳﺘﺿﺨﺔﺪﺍﻋﻠﻡﻰﻣﺘﺍﻟﺼﺸﻔﺎﺢﺷ ﺍﺔﻟ\"ﻮﻳﺻـﺐ\"‪62‬ﺻـ‪1501‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻨﺺ ﺍﻟﻤُﺘﺎﺡ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻨﺼﻮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬

‫‪163‬‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ‪ -‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ \"ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ\"‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬ ‫ﺗﻌﺘﻤﺪ‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻟ ًﻴﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﺑﻤﺼﺪﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﺘﻴﺢ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﺧﻔﺾ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻮﻳﺶ‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﻓﺮﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪﻩ ﺣﺎﻟ ًﻴﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﻘﻠﻞ ﺍﻟﺨﻔﻘﺎﻥ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺎﻇﺮﻳﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪RGBCMY‬‬ ‫ﻣﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬ ‫ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻞ‪ ،‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺪﺭ ﺛﻢ ﺣﺪﺩﻩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﺤﺪﺩ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺼﻴﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻨﻮﻋﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﺎﺑﻚ‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬ ‫‪ :RGBCMY‬ﻳﻀﺒﻂ ﺗﺪﺭﺝ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺸﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻧﻲ ﻭﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ‬ ‫)ﻟﺪﺧﻞ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺸﺎﺑﻚ‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺇﺷﺮﺍﻕ ﺃﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﺧﺘﻼﻑ ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻋﻬﺎ ﻭﺑﻴﺌﺎﺗﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻌﻴﺔ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ‬ ‫ﻟﻜﻞ ﻟﻮﻥ ‪) R‬ﺃﺣﻤﺮ( ﻭ‪) G‬ﺃﺧﻀﺮ( ﻭ‪) B‬ﺃﺯﺭﻕ( ﻭ‪) C‬ﺳﻤﺎﻭﻱ(‬ ‫]‪([480i/576i/1080i‬‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ‬ ‫ﺗﻔﺘﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺄﻛﻤﻠﻬﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻘﺘﻴﻤﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﻓﺮﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ‬ ‫ﻭ‪) M‬ﺃﺭﺟﻮﺍﻧﻲ( ﻭ‪) Y‬ﺃﺻﻔﺮ(‪.‬‬ ‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺎﻳﻦ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﻴﺌﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻌﺘﻤﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺣﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺎﻳﻦ‬ ‫ﻋﺎﺩﻱ‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺣﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﺸﺒﻊ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ‬ ‫ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﺎﺑﻚ‪ :‬ﻳﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺇﻣﺎ ﻟﻠﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﺜﺎﻓﺔ ﺃﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺣﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﻈﻠﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺸﺎﺑﻜﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺄﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬ ‫ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺧﻀﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﺭﺟﻮﺍﻧﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺣﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺤﺪﺓ‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺣﺔ‬ ‫ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻋﺪﻣﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫—‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺣﺪﺓ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺧﻔﻮﺗﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ :‬ﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺳﺮﻳﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻛﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺗﻪ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪ :‬ﻣﻌﻈﻢ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﻕ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻈﻠﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ‬ ‫ﻣﺨﺼﺺ‬ ‫• ﻓﻴﻠﻢ‪/‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪ :‬ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﻭﺭﺳﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻭﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺤﺮﻛﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺣﻤﺮ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻣﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‪ :‬ﻳﻀﺒﻂ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻧﻴﺔ ﺣﺴﺐ ﻭﺿﻊ‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ \"ﻭﺿﻌﻴﺔ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ\" ﻣﻀﺒﻮ ًﻃﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺣﺪﺩﺗﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺩﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻜﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺳﻴﻨﻤﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﺨﺼﺺ‪ :‬ﻳﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﻮﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﺩﻳﺔ ‪) R‬ﺃﺣﻤﺮ( ﻭ ‪) G‬ﺃﺧﻀﺮ( ﻭ‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺼﺮ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺇﺳﻘﺎﻁ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩ‬ ‫‪) B‬ﺃﺯﺭﻕ( ﻹﺯﺍﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﻭﺍﻛﺘﺴﺎﺑﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻀﺒﻮ ًﻃﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫{ ﻣﻤﺘﺪ < ﺇﺳﻘﺎﻁ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩ < ﺇﺳﻘﺎﻁ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩ‬ ‫ﻳﻌﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﻗﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻣﺎﻋﺪﺍ ﻭﺿﻌﻴﺔ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺗﻬﺎ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻻ ﻳﺆﺛﺮ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ‪ .‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﺳﺘﻬﻼﻙ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ ECO‬ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ‪a.‬‬ ‫‪ y‬ﺍﺭﺗﺒﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺻﻠﺔ‬ ‫• \"ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺣﺔ\" ﺻـ‪65‬‬

‫‪164‬‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ‪ -‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ \"ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ\"‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ‬ ‫ﺗﺟﻌﻬﺘﺎﻤﺯﺪﺍﻟﺍﻌﻹﺮﻋﺪﺽﺍﺩﺗﺍﻠﻘﺕﺎﺋﺍﻴًﻟﺎﻤﺇﺘﻋﻮﺍﺪﻓﺍﺮﺩﺍﺓﺕﻋﻠﺇﻰﺷﺎﺭﻣﺓﺼﺍﺪﻹﺭﺩﺍﻟﺧﺎﺪﻝﺧ ﻭﻞﻳﺍﻟﺤﺬﺴﻨﻱﻬﺎﺗ‪.‬ﻢﺇ ﺗﺫﺍﺤﺭﺪﻳﻏﺒﺪﻩﺖ‬ ‫ﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﻳﻜﺘﺸﻒ‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺣﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﺰﺍﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻟﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﻹﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻻﻧﺤﺮﺍﻓﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﺪﺍﺧﻼﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺻﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﻊ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫—‬ ‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬ ‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺑﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻷﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪:‬‬ ‫‪a‬‬ ‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺢ ﺯﺍﺋﺪ‬ ‫• ‪USB Display‬‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﻣﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬ ‫• ‪USB‬‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬ ‫• ‪LAN‬‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻊ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﻳﻜﻮﻥ‬ ‫)ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬ ‫ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺴﻴﻦ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ‬ ‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ‬ ‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ(‪.‬‬ ‫‪%4‬‬ ‫‪%8‬‬ ‫ﺗﻐﻴﺮ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﻟﺘﺠﻌﻞ ﺍﻟﺤﻮﺍﻑ ﻇﺎﻫﺮﺓ ﺑﻨﺴﺒﺔ‬ ‫ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪HDMI‬‬ ‫ﻣﺌﻮﻳﺔ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪ :HDMI‬ﻳﻀﺒﻂ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻟﻴﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻤﻮ ﱠﺻﻞ ﺑﻤﻨﻔﺬ ‪.HDMI‬‬ ‫ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬ ‫• ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪ :‬ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋ ًﻴﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫—‬ ‫• ﻋﺎﺩﻱ‪ :‬ﻳُﺨﺼﺺ ﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺁﺧﺮ ﺳﻮﻯ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪﻩ ﺃﻳﻀًﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺗﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺳﺎﻃﻌﺔ ﻟﻠﻐﺎﻳﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻦ‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻣﻤﺘﺪ‪ :‬ﻳُﺨﺼﺺ ﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﻟﻠﻐﺎﻳﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪﻩ ﺃﻳﻀًﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻗﺎﺗﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ‪ :‬ﻳﺤﺪﺩ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺼﺎﺩﺭ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﻮ ﱠﺻﻠﺔ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺈﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺘﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﻭ ﺗﺰﺍﻣﻦ ﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﻊ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ]‪a[Auto‬‬ ‫ﺑﻤﻨﺎﻓﺬ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪ :‬ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋ ًﻴﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫• ‪ :RGB‬ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪/RGB‬ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫• ‪ :Component‬ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﻮﻥ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪ :‬ﻳﺤﺪﺩ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺼﺎﺩﺭ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺻﱠﻠﺔ‬ ‫ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻞ‪ ،‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺪﺭ ﺛﻢ ﺣﺪﺩﻩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﻤﻨﺎﻓﺬ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﺗﺪﺍﺧﻞ ﺃﻭ ﻋﺪﻡ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻋﻨﺪ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻄﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻼﺋﻤﺔ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮ ﱠﺻﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬ ‫ﻋﺎﺩﻱ‬ ‫ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﻞ ﻗﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺑﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‬ ‫ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻓﻪ‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ‬ ‫ﻻ‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺩﻗﺔ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﻋﺮﻳﺾ‬ ‫ﻣﺘﺎﺑﻌﺔ‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺗﻬﺎ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺜﻨﺎﺀ ﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﻟﻨﺴﺐ‬ ‫• ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬ ‫‪ y‬ﺍﺭﺗﺒﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺻﻠﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﻀﺒﻂ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ )ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ(‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺣﺔ‬ ‫• \"ﻧﺴﺐ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺣﺔ\" ﺻـ‪63‬‬ ‫ﻟﻤﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﻹﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﻁ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺳﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪.‬‬

‫‪165‬‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺳﻤﺔ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ‪ -‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ \"ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ\"‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬ ‫ﺗﺘﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﻘﺴﻢ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺃﻓﻘﻴﺎ ﻭﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﻴﻦ ﺟﻨﺒﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﻨﺐ‬ ‫)ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ]‪ [Esc‬ﻹﻟﻐﺎﺀ ﻋﺮﺽ ‪) screen display‬ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫‪Split Screen‬‬ ‫)ﻳﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺴﻮﻣﺔ(‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﺼﺪﺭ‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ‪*ELPCB02‬‬ ‫ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻣﻀﺒﻮ ًﻃﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪(.‬‬ ‫ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬ ‫ﻣﺤﺎﺫﺍﺓ‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻘﻠﻢ *‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻘﻠﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻬﺪﻑ *‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ *‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺭﻣﺰ ‪QR‬‬ ‫ﺇﻧﻬﺎﺀ ‪Split Screen‬‬ ‫ﻳﻀﺒﻂ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺣﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺗﺼﻐﻴﺮ‬ ‫ﻳﻀﺒﻂ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻮﻓﺮ ﻣﻮﺍﺿﻊ ﻣﺘﻨﻮﻋﺔ‬ ‫ﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﻳﻀﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺣﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺣﻔﻆ ﻗﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻟﻜﻞ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬ ‫ﻳﻀﺒﻂ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﺭﺗﺒﺎﻁ ‪: HDMI‬‬ ‫ﺍﺭﺗﺒﺎﻁ ‪HDMI‬‬ ‫ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﻫﻨﺪﺳﻲ‬ ‫ﻳﻀﺒﻂ ﻫﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻟﺘﺼﺒﺢ ﻣﺴﺘﻄﻴﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﻜﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻧﺤﺮﺍﻑ ﺃﻓﻘﻲ‪/‬ﺭﺃﺳﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ‪ :‬ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺑﺎﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺼﻠﺔ ﺑﻤﻨﺎﻓﺬ‬ ‫ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ‬ ‫‪Quick Corner‬‬ ‫‪.HDMI‬‬ ‫ﺍﻧﺤﺮﺍﻑ ﺃﻓﻘﻲ‪/‬ﺭﺃﺳﻲ‪ :‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﻟﺘﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺒﻴﻦ ﺍﻷﻓﻘﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﺭﺗﺒﺎﻁ ‪HDMI‬‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻟﺮﺃﺳﻲ ﻳﺪﻭ ًﻳﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺱ‬ ‫ﺍﺭﺗﺒﺎﻁ ‪ :HDMI‬ﻳﻤﻜﱢﻦ ﻣﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﺍﺭﺗﺒﺎﻁ ‪ HDMI‬ﺃﻭ ﻳﻌﻄﱢﻠﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺭﺗﺒﺎﻁ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫‪ :Quick Corner‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﻟﺘﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺷﻜﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﻣﺤﺎﺫﺍﺗﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﺍﺭﺗﺒﺎﻁ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻳﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻴﻤﺎ ﻳﺤﺪﺙ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺻﱠﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺱ‪ :‬ﻳﺼﺤﺢ ﺃﺭﻛﺎﻥ ﻭﺟﻮﺍﻧﺐ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺗﺠﺎﻩ‪ :‬ﻳﺸ ﱢﻐﻞ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻤﻮ ﱠﺻﻞ‬ ‫ﺛﻨﺎﺋﻲ‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﺳﻄﺢ ﻣﻘﻮﺱ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﻌﻜﺲ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺟﻬﺎﺯ‬ ‫• ﺗﺤﻤﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪ :‬ﻳﺤﻤﱢﻞ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺃﺟﺮﻳﺘﻬﺎ ﻭﺣﻔﻈﺘﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺸﻐﻞ‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋ ًﻴﺎ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﺟﻬﺎﺯ‬ ‫ﻳﺸ ﱢﻐﻞ‬ ‫ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ‪ <-‬ﺝ‪ .‬ﻋﺮﺽ‪:‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫• ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪ :‬ﻳﺤﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺸﻜﻞ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ ﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺗﻢ ﺿﺒﻄﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻤﻮ ﱠﺻﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺻﱠﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ‬ ‫ﻳﺸﻐﱢﻞ‬ ‫ﺝ‪ .‬ﻋﺮﺽ ‪ <-‬ﺟﻬﺎﺯ‪:‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺭﺗﺒﺎﻁ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‪ :‬ﻳﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻮ ﱠﺻﻠﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ‬ ‫ﺍﺭﺗﺒﺎﻁ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬ ‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﺨﺰﻥ ﺍﻟﺮﺍﺑﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ‬ ‫ﻣﺨﺰﻥ ﺍﻟﺮﺍﺑﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ‪ :‬ﻳﺤ ﱢﺴﻦ ﺃﺩﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺗﺒﻄﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ‬ ‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﺭﺗﺒﺎﻁ ‪ HDMI‬ﻻ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ‬ ‫ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ‪.‬‬

‫‪166‬‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺳﻤﺔ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ‪ -‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ \"ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ\"‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ‪ :‬ﻳﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ‬ ‫ﻳﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺯﺭ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﺘﺄﻣﻴﻦ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪:‬‬ ‫ﻗﻔﻞ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﻔﻞ‬ ‫ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ‬ ‫ﻛﻮﺳﻴﻠﺔ ﻣﺴﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺪﻳﻤﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﻔﻞ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ‪ :‬ﻳﻘﻔﻞ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ ‪:1‬‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ‬ ‫ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ‪ :‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﻧﻤ ًﻄﺎ ﻣﻦ ‪ 1‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ 4‬ﺃﻭ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‪ .‬ﺗﻌﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬ ‫ﻗﻔﻞ ﺟﺰﺋﻲ‪ :‬ﻳﻘﻔﻞ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﻣﺎ ﻋﺪﺍ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ ‪:2‬‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻣﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﻣﻦ ‪ 1‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ 4‬ﺍﻷﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻤﺴ ﱠﺠﻠﺔ ﺳﺎﺑ ًﻘﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ ‪:3‬‬ ‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ :‬ﻻ ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﺃﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﻣﻘﻔﻮﻟﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺘﻘﺒﻞ ﺗﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‬ ‫ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﻄﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﻄﺮﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﻐﻴﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫—‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬ ‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‪ :‬ﻳﻠﺘﻘﻂ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﻭﻳﺤﻔﻈﻬﺎ ﻛﻨﻤﻂ ﻟﻠﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ‪ :‬ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﻧﻤﻮﺫﺝ ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﻳﻀﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺻﻮﺕ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬ ‫ﺃﻣﺎﻣﻲ‪/‬ﺧﻠﻔﻲ‬ ‫ﻧﻤﻂ‬ ‫ﻣﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮ ًﻧﺎ ﻣﻮﺻﱠﻼً‪.‬‬ ‫ﺃﻣﺎﻣﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮﻫﺎ‪/‬ﺗﺼﻐﻴﺮﻫﺎ ﻭﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺷﻜﻠﻬﺎ )ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‬ ‫ﺧﻠﻔﻲ‬ ‫]‪ [Esc‬ﻹﻟﻐﺎﺀ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻮﺫﺝ(‪.‬‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺭﻓﻊ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻣﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺧﻔﺾ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺻﻮﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻤﻮ ﱠﺻﻞ ﺍﻵﺧﺮ؛ ﻭﻋﻨﺪ ﺧﻔﻀﻪ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺭﻓﻊ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺻﻮﺕ‬ ‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺻﱠﻞ ﺍﻵﺧﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﻬﻼﻙ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻧﻤﻂ ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﻳﺤﺪﺩ ﺍﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻝ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻘﺒﻞ‬ ‫ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻣﺘﺒﻘﻴﺔ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ؛ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻘﺒﻼﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﺎﺑﻚ‬ ‫ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬ ‫‪16:10‬‬ ‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ‬ ‫ﻳﺨﺼﺺ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻟﺰﺭ ]‪ [User‬ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ‬ ‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺣﺴﺐ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺳﺘﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫‪4:3‬‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺑﻠﻤﺴﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻣﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ‬ ‫ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬ ‫)‪EB-695Wi/EB-‬‬ ‫ﻳﺤﺪﺩ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻨﻮﻋﺔ‪:‬‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ‬ ‫‪685Wi/EB-680Wi‬‬ ‫ﻣﻌﺎﻳﺮﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ *‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﻞ ﻗﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺑﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺭﻣﺰ ‪QR‬‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺗﻬﺎ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺜﻨﺎﺀ ﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪:‬‬ ‫‪EB-675Wi/EB-/‬‬ ‫• ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺗﺼﻐﻴﺮ‬ ‫‪(685W/EB-675W‬‬ ‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ‬ ‫• ﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫• ﺍﺭﺗﺒﺎﻁ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫—‬ ‫• ﺍﺭﺗﺒﺎﻁ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬ ‫)‪(EB-680/EB-670‬‬ ‫• ﻣﺨﺰﻥ ﺍﻟﺮﺍﺑﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ‬ ‫• ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬ ‫—‬ ‫* ﻳﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻟﻠﻄﺮﺍﺯ ‪.EB-695Wi/EB-685Wi/EB-680Wi/EB-675Wi‬‬ ‫ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻧﻤﻂ ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﻣﺘﺒﻘﻴﺔ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ‪.‬‬

‫‪167‬‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ‪ -‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ \"ﻣﻤﺘﺪ\"‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬ ‫ﺗﺘﻴﺢ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻣﻤﺘﺪ ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﻣﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺀ‬ ‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺀ‪ :‬ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺀ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺷﻌﺎﺭ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ‬ ‫ﻛﺘﻢ ﺻﻮﺕ ‪A/V‬‬ ‫ﺷﻌﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬ ‫ﻳﺒﺪﺃ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺗﺴﺎﻕ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ‬ ‫ﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﻛﺘﻢ ﺻﻮﺕ ‪ :A/V‬ﻳﺘﻴﺢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻟﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺸﻌﺎﺭ ﻟﻠﻌﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﺃﺷﺮﻃﺔ ﺍﻷﺩﻭﺍﺕ *‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺭﻣﺰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻘﻠﻢ *‬ ‫ﺍﺗﺴﺎﻕ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ‪ :‬ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻨﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ *‬ ‫ﺃﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻛﻜﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫—‬ ‫• ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ‪ :‬ﻳﺘﻴﺢ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺃﻣﺎﻣﻲ‬ ‫• ﺑﺪﺀ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ‪ :‬ﻳﺘﻴﺢ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ‬ ‫ﺃﻣﺎﻣﻲ‪/‬ﻣﻘﻠﻮﺏ‬ ‫ﺧﻠﻔﻲ‬ ‫ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺃﻟﻮﺍﻧﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺮﺍﺀ ﻭﺍﻟﺨﻀﺮﺍﺀ ﻭﺍﻟﺰﺭﻗﺎﺀ‪ ،‬ﻛﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺪﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺧﻠﻔﻲ‪/‬ﻣﻘﻠﻮﺏ‬ ‫ﺃﺷﺮﻃﺔ ﺍﻷﺩﻭﺍﺕ‪ :‬ﻳﺘﻴﺢ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻣﺎ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺮﻳﻂ‬ ‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮ‬ ‫ﻭﻳﻌﺪ‬ ‫ﺍﺍﻟﺮﻻﻓﺳﺘﺮﻢﺍﺩﺿﺍﺋﻲ ًﻤﺎﻫﻋﻮﻨ ﺇﺪﺧﺍﻔﺳﺎﺘﺀﺨﻟﺪﻮﺍﻗﻡ ﺍﺖﻟﻤﻣﻴﺰﺤﺍﺪﺩﺕ‪.‬ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﻋﻠﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺃﺩﻭﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻌﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺭﻭﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬ ‫ﺑﺤﺚ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺪﺭ‬ ‫ﺭﻣﺰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻘﻠﻢ‪ :‬ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻨﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ‬ ‫ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻘﻠﻢ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﻋﻠﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪ :‬ﺍﺿﺒﻄﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬ ‫ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﺍﻷﺩﻭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﻔﻠﻲ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﻋﻠﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﺤﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻤﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻨﻮﻋﺔ ﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬ ‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪Easy‬‬ ‫‪Easy Interactive‬‬ ‫‪Interactive‬‬ ‫ﻳﺨﻠﻖ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﺎ ﻳﻌﺮﺿﻬﺎ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﻔﺴﻪ ﻭﺗﻌﺰﻳﺰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﻋﻠﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪* Function‬‬ ‫ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻥ‪.‬‬ ‫‪Function‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻳﺤﺪﺩ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻧﺤﻮ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻛﻲ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﻳﺤﺪﺩ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻮﺟﻬﻪ ﺑﺪﺭﺟﺔ ﺻﺤﻴﺤﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﺎ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﻋﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ‬ ‫ﺣﺪﺩ‬ ‫ﺗﺗﻠﻠﻘﻘﺎﺎﺋﺋ ًﻴﺎﻲ‪:‬‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺪﻡ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﺃﻡ ﻻ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ‬ ‫ﺩﺧﻞ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﺤﺪﺩ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ‪/1‬ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ‪ :2‬ﻳﺤﺪﺩ ﺗﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ‬ ‫ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ‪1‬‬ ‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮ‪ :‬ﻳﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻠﻪ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ‪2‬‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎﺀ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﺤﺪﺩ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺭﺳﺎﺋﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻌﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺭﻭﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪ :‬ﺗﻨﻈﻢ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﺭﺳﺎﺋﻞ‪ :‬ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﻣﺜﻞ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﻢ‬ ‫ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺳﻢ ﻭﺿﻌﻴﺔ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺃﻭ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺗﺰﻳﺪ ﻋﻦ ‪1500‬ﻣﺘﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺃﻭ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻻ ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺤﺬﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﻣﺮﺗﻔﻌﺔ‪ ،‬ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺑﺤﺚ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺪﺭ‪ :‬ﺍﺿﺒﻄﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻟﻠﻜﺸﻒ ﻋﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺇﺫﺍ‬ ‫ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓﺍﻟﺪﺧﻞ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋ ًﻴﺎ ﻭﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻌﺬﺭ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺩﺧﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﻢ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺭﺳﺎﺋﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺧﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ :‬ﺗﻀﺒﻂ ﻟﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺸﻌﺎﺭ ﻟﻴﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻠﻘﻰ‬ ‫ﺧﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻻ ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ‪.‬‬

‫‪168‬‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ‪ -‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ \"ﻣﻤﺘﺪ\"‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬ ‫‪Easy Interactive‬‬ ‫‪ USB‬ﻣﻦ ﻧﻮﻉ ‪* B‬‬ ‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪A/V‬‬ ‫‪ :Easy Interactive Function‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬ ‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ‪ :‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺑﺪﺀ‬ ‫ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﻋﻠﻴﺔ ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ )ﻭﺿﻊ‬ ‫‪Function‬‬ ‫ﺇﺳﻘﺎﻁ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻞ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﺟﻬﺎﺯ‬ ‫ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ‬ ‫ﺍﻣﻟﻌﺼﺮﺪﺭﺽﺍﻟﻣﻨﺼﻪﻮﺭﺗﻠﺓﻘﺍﺎﻟﺋﻴًﺬﺎ‪.‬ﻱ ﻋﺗﻨﻢﺪ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻔﺬ ﺧﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﻋﻠﻲ(‪ .‬ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺘﺎﻥ‪ USB Display‬ﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﻭﺱ‬ ‫‪USB Display/Easy‬‬ ‫ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﻓﺈﻧﻪ‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪﻩ‪,‬‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻌﻴﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻌﺪﺍﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ‪ELPCB02‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺘﻮﻓﺮﺗﻴﻦ‪.‬‬ ‫‪Interactive‬‬ ‫‪Function‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ *‬ ‫‪:USB Display/Easy Interactive Function‬‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻔﺬ ﺧﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ :‬ﻳﺘﻴﺢ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻞ ﻭﺍﻟﺨﺮﺝ ﻟﻤﻨﺎﻓﺬ‬ ‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﻋﻠﻴﺔ ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺎﻭﺱ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ‪USB/‬‬ ‫‪ .Computer2/Monitor Out‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ‬ ‫ﻣﺨﺮﺝ ‪A/V‬‬ ‫ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ )ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﻋﻠﻲ( ﻭ ‪.USB Display‬‬ ‫‪Display‬‬ ‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺣ ّﺪﺩ ﺧﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﻣﺨﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬ ‫ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﻭﺱ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺘﻮﻓﺮﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻣﺮﻛﺐ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺼﺎﺩﺭ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ‬ ‫ﻣﺨﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ‪HDMI1‬‬ ‫ﺇﺳﻘﺎﻁ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩ‬ ‫ﻣﺨﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ‪HDMI2‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺎﻭﺱ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ‪ :USB Display/‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ‪.2‬‬ ‫ﻣﺨﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ‪HDMI3‬‬ ‫ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﻭﺱ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ ﻭ ‪ .USB Display‬ﻻ‬ ‫ﺭﻗﻢ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻌﻴﺔ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ‪ :ELPCB02‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻋﻠﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﻋﻠﻴﺔ ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﺗﺴﺎﻕ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ‬ ‫ﻣﻮ ﱠﺻﻠﺔ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫)ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﻋﻠﻲ(‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ‬ ‫ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺻﱠﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻨﻔﺬ ‪ .HDMI3‬ﻭﻋﻨﺪ‬ ‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻣﻦ ﻋﺪﺓ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﻋﺮﺽ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻄﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻞ ﺑﻴﻦ‬ ‫‪RGBCMY‬‬ ‫‪ HDMI2‬ﻭ‪ HDMI3‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﻛﻞ ﺿﻐﻄﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‬ ‫ﺇﺳﻘﺎﻁ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩ‪ :‬ﺍﺿﺒﻄﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻟﻤﻄﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬ ‫]‪ [HDMI2‬ﻓﻲ ﻋﻠﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﻋﺪﺓ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﻋﺮﺽ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻄﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪ :‬ﻳﺘﻴﺢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﻭﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻨﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻮﺍﺀ‬ ‫ﻋﺪﻡ‬ ‫ﻟﻤﻨﻊ‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋ ًﻴﺎ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻟﻴﺴﺮﻯ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻗﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﺼﻴﻔﻲ‪ :‬ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺿﺒﻄﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ‬ ‫{ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ < ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ < ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻗﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﺼﻴﻔﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫{ ‪ < ECO‬ﺍﺳﺘﻬﻼﻙ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ < ﻋﺎﺩﻱ‬ ‫• ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ‪ :‬ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺿﺒﻄﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋ ًﻴﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺧﺎﺩﻡ ﺗﻮﻗﻴﺖ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ‬ ‫ﺭﻗﻤًﺎ‬ ‫ﻳﺨﺼﺺ‬ ‫ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺭﻗﻢ‬ ‫ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﻋﺮﺽ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻋﺪﺓ‬ ‫ﻳﺤﺪﺩ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﻟﻤﺨﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪:‬‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻌﻴﺔ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ‪ :‬ﻳﻀﺒﻂ ﺇﺷﺮﺍﻕ ﺃﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﺧﺘﻼﻑ ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻋﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﻣﺨﺮﺝ ‪ :A/V‬ﺍﺿﺒﻄﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺩﺍﺋﻤﺎ ﻹﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ‬ ‫ﻭﺑﻴﺌﺎﺗﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻋﺪﺓ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﻋﺮﺽ‪ ،‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻭﺿﻊ‬ ‫ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻌﺪﺍﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫)ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺃﻭ ًﻻ ﻭﺿﻌﻴﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﻧﻔﺴﻪ ﻟﻜﻞ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ ECO‬ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪(.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺗﺴﺎﻕ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ‪ :‬ﻳﻀﺒﻂ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﻟﻠﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ‪ :‬ﻳﻀﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺑﻴﺢ ﺑﻴﻦ ‪ 1‬ﻭ‪5‬‬ ‫ﻣﺨﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪ :‬ﻳﺤﺪﺩ ﻣﻨﻔﺬ ﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺧﺘﻼﻑ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻵﺧﺮ‪ .‬ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻫﺬﺍ‬ ‫ﺃﻱ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺁﺧﺮ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﻨﻔﺬ ‪.HDMI‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺼﺮ ﺇﻻ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﺳﺘﻬﻼﻙ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻣﻀﺒﻮ ًﻃﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﺎﺩﻱ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻨﻔﺬ ‪ ،Audio‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ‪ 3‬ﻹﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪.ECO‬‬ ‫ﻣﺨﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ‪/HDMI1‬ﻣﺨﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ‪/HDMI2‬ﻣﺨﺮﺝ‬ ‫ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‪ :‬ﻳﺼﺤﺢ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻼﻑ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻟﻮﻥ ﻛﻞ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ‪ :HDMI3‬ﻳﺤﺪﺩ ﻣﻨﻔﺬ ﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﻣﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﻭﺳﻄﻮﻋﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﻣﻨﺎﻓﺬ ‪.HDMI‬‬ ‫‪ :RGBCMY‬ﻳﻀﺒﻂ ﺗﺪﺭﺝ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻧﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﺒﻊ ﻭ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ‬ ‫ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻨﻔﺬ ‪ ،Audio‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ‪ 3‬ﻹﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﻤﻜﻮﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ‪) R‬ﺃﺣﻤﺮ( ﻭ ‪) G‬ﺃﺧﻀﺮ( ﻭ ‪) B‬ﺃﺯﺭﻕ( ﻭ ‪C‬‬ ‫)ﺳﻤﺎﻭﻱ( ﻭ ‪) M‬ﺃﺭﺟﻮﺍﻧﻲ( ﻭ ‪) Y‬ﺃﺻﻔﺮ(‪.‬‬

‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ‪ -‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ \"ﻣﻤﺘﺪ\" ‪169‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ \"ﻣﻤﺘﺪ\" ‪ -‬ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ \"‪\"Easy Interactive Function‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ‬ ‫ﺗﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Easy Interactive Function‬ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻋﻨﺪ‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ‪ :‬ﻳﻌﻴﺪ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻛﻞ ﻗﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺇﺳﻘﺎﻁ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﻋﻠﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺗﻬﺎ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺣﺔ‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ‬ ‫‪ y‬ﺍﺭﺗﺒﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺻﻠﺔ‬ ‫—‬ ‫• \"ﻋﺎﻡ\" ﺻـ‪169‬‬ ‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﻟﻐﺔ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻭﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫• \"ﻣﺘﻔﺎﻋﻞ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ\" ﺻـ‪170‬‬ ‫ﻳﻌﻴﺪ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻛﻞ ﻗﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻣﻤﺘﺪ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺗﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺜﻨﺎﺀ ﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪:‬‬ ‫ﻋﺎﻡ‬ ‫• ‪* Easy Interactive Function‬‬ ‫ﺗﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺠﺰﺀ ﻋﺎﻡ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﻋﻠﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺃﺷﺮﻃﺔ ﺍﻷﺩﻭﺍﺕ *‬ ‫{ ﻣﻤﺘﺪ < ‪ < Easy Interactive Function‬ﻋﺎﻡ‬ ‫• ﺭﻣﺰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻘﻠﻢ *‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬ ‫• ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ *‬ ‫ﻳﺒﺪﺃ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬﻫﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﻠﻢ‪.‬‬ ‫—‬ ‫ﻣﻌﺎﻳﺮﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ‬ ‫• ﺷﻌﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬ ‫ﻣﻌﺎﻳﺮﺓ ﻳﺪﻭﻳﺔ‬ ‫• ﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﻳﺤﺪﺩ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻠﻤﺲ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻠﻤﺲ *‬ ‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ‪ :‬ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺟﻌﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ‬ ‫• ﻭﺿﻌﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺭﻭﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻘﻠﻢ‬ ‫• ﺑﺤﺚ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺪﺭ‬ ‫ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻠﻤﺲ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﻭﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ‪ :‬ﻳﺸﻐﱢﻞ ﻃﺎﻗﺔ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻠﻤﺲ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻌﺎﻳﺮﺓ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻤﺲ‬ ‫ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻢ‬ ‫• ﻣﻨﻔﺬ ﺧﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﻭﻳﺔ‪ :‬ﻳﻀﺒﻂ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻧﺘﺸﺎﺭ ﺿﻮﺀ ﺍﻟﻠﻴﺰﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻖ ﺗﻮﺿﻴﺤﻲ ‪PC Free‬‬ ‫ﻣﺘﻘﺪﻡ )ﺍﻟﺠﺰﺀ ﻣﺘﻘﺪﻡ(‬ ‫• ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ‪ELPCB02‬‬ ‫ﻣﻌﺎﻳﺮﺓ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻤﺲ‪ :‬ﻳﺘﻴﺢ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﺮﺓ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺑﺈﺻﺒﻌﻚ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﺘﻔﺎﻋﻞ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬ ‫• ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ *‬ ‫ﻳﺤﺪﺩ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻘﻠﻤﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﻋﻠﻴﻴﻦ‬ ‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫• ﻣﺨﺮﺝ ‪A/V‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻖ‬ ‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬ ‫• ‪ USB‬ﻣﻦ ﻧﻮﻉ ‪* B‬‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺿﻴﺤﻲ ‪ .PC Free‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫• ﺇﺳﻘﺎﻁ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺘﻔﺎﻋﻞ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺭﻗﻢ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ ﺳﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﻠﻢ‬ ‫• ﻭﺿﻌﻴﺔ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺤﻮﻡ ﺑﻪ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﺗﺤ ﱢﺮﻛﻪ ﺣﻮﻟﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‬ ‫• ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪ :‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪ .2‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﺑﻴﻦ‬ ‫ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺃﻃﻮﻝ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺘﺮﻳﻦ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﻠﻢ‬ ‫* ﻳﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻟﻠﻄﺮﺍﺯ ‪.EB-695Wi/EB-685Wi/EB-680Wi/EB-675Wi‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﻋﻠﻲ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪ ،2‬ﻓﺤﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪.1‬‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺷﻌﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺑﻜﻠﻤﺔ ﻣﺮﻭﺭ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬ ‫‪a‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﻠﻘﺔ ﺑﻌﺮﺽ ﺷﻌﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ )ﺧﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺀ ﻭﻛﺘﻢ ﺻﻮﺕ ‪ A/V‬ﻓﻲ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ(‪ .‬ﺍﺿﺒﻂ‬ ‫ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺷﻌﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺃﻭﻻً‪.‬‬ ‫‪ y‬ﺍﺭﺗﺒﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺻﻠﺔ‬ ‫• \"ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ \"ﻣﻤﺘﺪ\" ‪ -‬ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ \"‪ \"\"Easy Interactive Function‬ﺻـ‪169‬‬ ‫• \"ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﻣﻴﻦ ﺑﻜﻠﻤﺔ ﻣﺮﻭﺭ\" ﺻـ‪134‬‬

‫‪170‬‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ‪ -‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ \"ﻣﻤﺘﺪ\"‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻊ ‪Windows/Mac‬‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﻠﻢ‬ ‫ﺗﺰﺍﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﻳﺤﺪﺩ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﻠﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﻋﻠﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻠﻤﺲ ﺑﺈﺻﺒﻌﻚ ﺣﺴﺐ‬ ‫ﺗﺰﺍﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪ :‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻣﻮﱠﺻﻠﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬ ‫ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺒﱠﺖ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻊ ‪Ubuntu‬‬ ‫ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺮ ﺍﻷﻳﻤﻦ‬ ‫ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻛﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺤﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺳﻠﻜﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺇﺳﻘﺎﻁ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩ‬ ‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﻣﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻊ ‪ :Windows/Mac‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ‬ ‫ﺇﺳﻘﺎﻁ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩ‪ :‬ﻳﺤﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﻊ )ﺍﻷﻳﻤﻦ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﻳﺴﺮ( ﻟﻜﻞ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻜﻴﺔ‬ ‫‪ Windows‬ﺃﻭ ‪.Mac‬‬ ‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﻣﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﻋﻠﻴﺔ ﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻣﻊ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻊ ‪ :Ubuntu‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪ .Ubuntu‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻫﺬﺍ‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ﺳﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﻠﻢ‬ ‫ﺟﻬﺎﺯﻱ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺟﻨﺒًﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﻨﺐ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺣﺒﺮ ‪ Windows‬ﻋﺒﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﻠﻢ‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻜﻴﺔ‪ :‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﻮ ﱠﺻﻠﺔ‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺁﻟﻲ ﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻠﻢ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻛﺒﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﻋﻠﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﻠﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﻋﻠﻲ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪ ،1‬ﻓﺤﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﻳﺪﻭﻱ ﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﻗﻠﻢ‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﻥ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ‬ ‫‪.2‬‬ ‫ﺑﺴﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﻠﻢ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻹﺻﺒﻊ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﻧﻔﺲ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺮ ﺑﺰﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﻭﺱ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﻳﻤﻦ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟ ُﺴﻤﻚ‬ ‫ﺭﻓﻴﻊ‬ ‫ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ﻋﺎﺩﻱ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺒﻖ‪ :‬ﻳﺘﻴﺢ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ‬ ‫ﻗﻠﻢ‬ ‫ﺳﻤﻚ‬ ‫ﺳﻤﻚ ﻗﻠﻢ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺒﻖ‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺭﻓﻴﻊ ﺃﻭ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺳﻤﻴﻚ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﻂ‬ ‫ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻤﺤﺎﺓ‬ ‫)ﻻ ﻳﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﺇﻻ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﻠﻢ ﻣﻀﺒﻮ ًﻃﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ‬ ‫ﻟﻮﺡ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ‬ ‫‪(.Ubuntu‬‬ ‫ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻤﺤﺎﺓ‪ :‬ﻳﺘﻴﺢ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻋﺎﺩﻱ ﺃﻭ ﻛﺒﻴﺮ ﻟﻠﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻤﺤﻮ‬ ‫ﻣﺘﻘﺪﻡ )ﺍﻟﺠﺰﺀ ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻖ ﺗﻮﺿﻴﺤﻲ ﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﻠﻢ‬ ‫ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺗﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺭﻓﻴﻊ ﺃﻭ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺳﻤﻴﻚ‪.‬‬ ‫‪(PC Free‬‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ﺳﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﻠﻢ‪ :‬ﻳﺘﻴﺢ ﺃﺩﺍﺀ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ \"ﻧﻘﺮ ﺑﺎﻟﺰﺭ ﺍﻷﻳﻤﻦ\" ﺃﻭ \"ﻧﻘﺮ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻟﺰﺭ ﺍﻷﻳﺴﺮ\" ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺳﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﻠﻢ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﻮﺡ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ‪ :‬ﻳﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺡ ‪ 2‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻌﺬﺭﺕ ﻋﻠﻴﻚ ﺭﺅﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺇﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﻟﻤﺲ ﺍﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ‬ ‫ﺃﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﻣﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫)ﻻ ﻳﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﺇﻻ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﻠﻢ ﻣﻀﺒﻮ ًﻃﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ‬ ‫ﺗﺄﻛﻴﺪ ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫‪(.Ubuntu‬‬ ‫ﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﻠﻢ‪ :‬ﻳﺘﻴﺢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﺎﻧﺐ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﻠﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﻋﻠﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺁﻟﻲ ﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻠﻢ‪ :‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬ ‫ﻋﻣﻴﻨﻦﻄ ﺍﻘﻟﺔﻮ ﺍﻟﺿﻘﻊﻠ ﺇﻢﻳﺗﻘﻠﺎﻘﺎﻑﺋ ًﻴﺎﺗﺸﻋﻨﻐﻴﺪﻞﺗﻐﺇﻴﺫﻴﺍﺮﻛﻨﺩﻗﺖﺔ‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ‬ ‫ﻻ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺻﱠﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺇﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﻟﻤﺲ ﺍﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ‪ :‬ﻳﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻤﺤﺎﺓ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻠﻢ ﺁﻟﻴﺎ‪ ،‬ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺳﺒﻖ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻢ ﺿﺒﻄﻬﺎ ﻳﺪﻭﻳًﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺃﻭ ﻣﺘﻔﺎﻋﻞ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻘﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺿﻴﺤﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﻳﺪﻭﻱ ﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﻗﻠﻢ‪ :‬ﻳﺘﻴﺢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻠﻢ ﻳﺪﻭﻳًﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺄﻛﻴﺪ ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ :‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪،‬‬ ‫‪ y‬ﺍﺭﺗﺒﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺻﻠﺔ‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﺄﻛﻴﺪ ﻗﺒﻞ ﻣﺴﺢ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺳﻮﻡ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫• \"ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻋﺪﺓ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﻦ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﺍﺯ\" ﺻـ‪33‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫* ﻳﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻟﻠﻄﺮﺍﺯ ‪.EB-695Wi/EB-680Wi‬‬ ‫ﻣﺘﻔﺎﻋﻞ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬ ‫ﺗﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺠﺰﺀ ﻣﺘﻔﺎﻋﻞ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫{ ﻣﻤﺘﺪ < ‪ < Easy Interactive Function‬ﻣﺘﻔﺎﻋﻞ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬

‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ‪ -‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ‪171‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬ ‫ﺗﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﻭﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﻠﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﻭﺗﻔﺎﺻﻴﻠﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻌﻠﻮ‪ .‬ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ‪ -‬ﺵ‪LAN .‬‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺑﻜﻠﻤﺔ ﻣﺮﻭﺭ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻌﺬﺭ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﻢ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﺭﻣﺰ ‪ QR‬ﻟﻼﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺄﺟﻬﺰﺓ ‪ iOS‬ﺃﻭ ‪Android‬‬ ‫‪DHCP‬‬ ‫ﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺃﻭﻻً‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ‪.Epson iProjection‬‬ ‫ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ‪IP‬‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺭﻣﺰ ‪QR‬‬ ‫ﻳﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺭﺳﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺓ‬ ‫ﻗﻨﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﻋﻠﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻮﺍﺑﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻚ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ‪MAC‬‬ ‫—‬ ‫ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ‪IP‬‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ *‬ ‫ﺟﻮﺩﺓ‬ ‫ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‬ ‫ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﻮﺭﻕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﺿﺎﻓﻴﺔ‬ ‫* ﻳﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻟﻠﻄﺮﺍﺯ ‪.EB-695Wi/EB-685Wi/EB-680Wi/EB-675Wi‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬ ‫ﺑﻤﺠﺮﺩ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬ ‫ﻃﺎﻗﺔ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪ LAN‬ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻚ‬ ‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪ LAN‬ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﺘﺼﻔﺢ ﻭﻳﺐ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ‪ ،‬ﺣﻴﺚ ﻳﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‪a.‬‬ ‫ﻳﻀﺒﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪ LAN‬ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺑﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪ LAN‬ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﻻ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ‬ ‫‪ y‬ﺍﺭﺗﺒﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺻﻠﺔ‬ ‫ﻋﺒﺮ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪ LAN‬ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺄﻭﻗﻒ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻟﻤﻨﻊ‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﻣﻌﻠﻮ‪ .‬ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ‪ -‬ﺵ‪LAN .‬‬ ‫• \"ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ‪ -‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ\" ﺻـ‪171‬‬ ‫ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺷﺐ ‪ LAN‬ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ‬ ‫• \"ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ LAN‬ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ\" ﺻـ‪172‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺧﺺ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻵﺧﺮﻳﻦ‪.‬‬ ‫• \"ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ \"ﺷﺒﻜﺔ\" ‪ -‬ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ \"ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪ LAN‬ﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ\"\" ﺻـ‪173‬‬ ‫ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﻭﺗﻔﺎﺻﻴﻠﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍﺋﻲ‬ ‫• \"ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ \"ﺷﺒﻜﺔ\" ‪ -‬ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ \"ﺇﺷﻌﺎﺭ\"\" ﺻـ‪174‬‬ ‫• \"ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ‪ -‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪) Others‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ(\" ﺻـ‪175‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﻢ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬ ‫• \"ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ‪ -‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ \"ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ\"\" ﺻـ‪176‬‬ ‫‪SSID‬‬ ‫• \"ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﻣﻴﻦ ﺑﻜﻠﻤﺔ ﻣﺮﻭﺭ\" ﺻـ‪134‬‬ ‫‪DHCP‬‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ‪ -‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ‪IP‬‬ ‫ﻗﻨﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻮﺍﺑﺔ‬ ‫ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ‪MAC‬‬ ‫ﺭﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ‬

‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ‪ -‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ‪172‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬ ‫{ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ < ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ < ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬ ‫ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻟﺘﻔﻌﻴﻞ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﻣﺮﻭﺭ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻥ ﻟﻤﻨﻊ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ‬ ‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻣﻦ ﻗِﺒﻞ ﺃﻱ ﺷﺨﺺ ﻟﻴﺲ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻐﺮﻓﺔ ﻧﻔﺴﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ‬ ‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﺑﻬﺎ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪ .‬ﻳﺠﺐ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻜﻠﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺸﻮﺍﺋﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪EasyMP Multi PC‬‬ ‫‪ Projection‬ﺃﻭ ‪ Epson iProjection‬ﻟﻠﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ‬ ‫ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻭﺇﺗﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺸﺎﺭﻛﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪ LAN‬ﺍﻟﻨﺺ ﻭﺭﻣﺰ ‪QR‬‬ ‫ﻧﺺ‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻗﺮﺍﺀﺓ ﺭﻣﺰ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺠﺎﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻌﺔ ‪ QR‬ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬ ‫‪ ،Epson iProjection‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺑﺒﺴﺎﻃﺔ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ‬ ‫ﻫﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﺑﺄﻥ‬ ‫ﻋﻠ ًﻤﺎ‬ ‫ﺷﺒﻜﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻋﺒﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺠﻮﺍﻝ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻨﺺ ﻭﺭﻣﺰ ‪.QR‬‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ LAN‬ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﻢ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﺗﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ‪ LAN‬ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺣﺘﻰ ‪ 16‬ﺣﺮﻓًﺎ ﺭﻣ ًﺰﺍ ﺃﺑﺠﺪ ًﻳﺎ ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﺳ ًﻤﺎ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﺩ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫{ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ < ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ < ﺵ ‪ LAN‬ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺭﻗﻤﻴًﺎ‬ ‫ﻛﻤﻠﺔ ﻣﺮﻭﺭ ‪PJLink‬‬ ‫ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﻣﺮﻭﺭ ‪Remote‬‬ ‫)ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ \" * ‪> ; : / , +‬‬ ‫= < ? ] \\ [ ` | ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﻣﺮﻭﺭ ﺗﺤﻜﻢ ‪Web‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻓﺎﺕ(‬ ‫ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﻣﺮﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺮﻑ‬ ‫ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﻣﺮﻭﺭ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﺮﻭﺗﻮﻛﻮﻝ ‪ PJLink‬ﻟﻠﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﺣﺘﻰ ‪ 32‬ﺣﺮﻓًﺎ ﺃﺑﺠﺪﻳًﺎ ﺭﻗﻤ ًﻴﺎ‬ ‫ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﻣﺮﻭﺭ ﻟﻠﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬ ‫ﺣﺘﻰ ‪ 8‬ﺃﺣﺮﻑ ﺭﻣﻮﺯ ﺃﺑﺠﺪﻳﺔ‬ ‫\"ﺗﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺍﻟﻮﻳﺐ\"‪) .‬ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻫﻮ‬ ‫ﺭﻗﻤﻴﺔ‬ ‫‪ ، EPSONREMOTE‬ﻭﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻭﺭ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ ﻫﻲ‬ ‫)ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ *‪ :‬ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻓﺎﺕ(‬ ‫‪(.guest‬‬ ‫ﺣﺘﻰ ‪ 8‬ﺣﺮﻭﻑ ﺭﻣﻮﺯ ﺃﺑﺠﺪﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﻣﺮﻭﺭ ﻟﻠﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺍﻟﻮﻳﺐ‪) .‬ﺍﺳﻢ‬ ‫ﺭﻗﻤﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻫﻮ ‪ ،EPSONWEB‬ﻭﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻭﺭ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ‬ ‫)ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ * ‪ :‬ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻓﺎﺕ(‬ ‫ﻫﻲ ‪(.admin‬‬ ‫ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﻣﺮﻭﺭ ﻟﻠﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻛﻤﺸﺮﻑ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬ ‫ﺭﻗﻢ ﻣﻜ ﱠﻮﻥ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺭﺑﻌﺔ ﺃﺭﻗﺎﻡ‬ ‫‪ EasyMP Multi PC Projection‬ﺃﻭ ‪Epson‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬ ‫‪) .iProjection‬ﻻ ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﻣﺮﻭﺭ ﺍﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ‪(.‬‬ ‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ‪:‬‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ‬

‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ‪ -‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ‪173‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬ ‫‪DHCP‬‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪IP‬‬ ‫‪ :DHCP‬ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻋﻨﺎﻭﻳﻦ‬ ‫ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ‪IP‬‬ ‫ﺳﺮﻳﻊ‪ :‬ﻳﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻌﺪﺓ ﻫﻮﺍﺗﻒ ﺫﻛﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﻟﻮﺣﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ﺳﺮﻳﻊ‬ ‫ﺑﺤﺚ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ‪ IP‬ﻟﻠﺸﺒﻜﺔ‬ ‫ﻗﻨﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪SSID‬‬ ‫ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻲ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫‪SSID‬‬ ‫ﻭﻗﻨﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ ﻭﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻮﺍﺑﺔ ﻳﺪﻭﻳﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻦ ‪0‬‬ ‫ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻮﺍﺑﺔ‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ‪IP‬‬ ‫ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻥ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ‪ EasyMP Multi PC Projection‬ﻟﻼﺗﺼﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ 255‬ﺣﺮﻓﺎ ﻟﻜﻞ ﺣﻘﻞ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ‪ .‬ﻳﺼﺒﺢ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﻭﺻﻮﻝ ﺳﻬﻞ‪) .‬ﻧﻮﺻﻲ‬ ‫ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺓ ﻣﺮﻭﺭ‬ ‫ﺗﺠﻨﺐ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﻭﻳﻦ‪ :‬ﻣﻦ ‪ 0.0.0.0‬ﺃﻭ ‪127.x.x.x‬‬ ‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﻗﻨﺎﺓ‬ ‫ﺃﻭ ‪ 224.0.0.0‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪) 255.255.255.255‬ﺣﻴﺚ ﺗﻤﺜﻞ ‪x‬‬ ‫ﺑﺄﻻ ﻳﺰﻳﺪ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﻋﻦ ﺳﺘﺔ ﻟﻠﺤﻔﺎﻅ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺩﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪(.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﻋﺪﺩًﺍ ﻳﺒﺪﺃ ﻣﻦ ‪ (0 - 255‬ﻟﻌﻨﻮﺍﻥ ‪ IP‬ﻭﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻮﺍﺑﺔ‬ ‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺳﺮﻳﻊ‪ :‬ﻳﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻌﺪﺓ ﻫﻮﺍﺗﻒ ﺫﻛﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﻟﻮﺣﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ﻣﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬ ‫ﻭ‪ 0.0.0.0‬ﻭ‪ 255.255.255.255‬ﻟﻘﻨﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻋﺒﺮ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﻭﺻﻮﻝ ﻣﺘﺼﻠﺔ ﺑﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻣﺎ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ‪ SSID‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺪﺍﺩ‬ ‫ﺍﺑﺤﺚ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﻭﺻﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺒﺤﺚ ﻓﻲ ﻋﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻣﺘﻘﺪﻡ‪ ،‬ﻭﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ‬ ‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻣﺎ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ‪ IP‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺪﺍﺩ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﻀﺒﻂ ‪) SSID‬ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ( ﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ‪LAN‬‬ ‫ﺣﺘﻰ ‪ 32‬ﺣﺮﻓًﺎ ﺃﺑﺠﺪ ًﻳﺎ ﺭﻗﻤ ًﻴﺎ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺳﻴﺘﺼﻞ ﺑﻬﺎ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﻳﺤﺪﺩ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻤُﺴﺘﺨﺪَﻡ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻣﺘﻘﺪﻡ‪ ،‬ﻳﻮﺻﻰ ﺑﺸﺪﺓ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻥ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻥ‪ ،‬ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﻣﺪﻳﺮ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ‬ ‫‪ WPA‬ﻫﻮ ﺃﺣﺪ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻔﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺤﺴﻴﻦ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻥ ﻟﻠﺸﺒﻜﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺣﻴﺚ ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺑﺪﻋﻢ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻃﺮﻕ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻔﻴﺮ ‪ TKIP‬ﻭ‪.AES‬‬ ‫ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﺸﺘﻤﻞ ‪ WPA‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﻣﺼﺎﺩﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‪ .‬ﺗﻮﻓﺮ ‪ WPA‬ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺘﻴﻦ ﻟﻠﺘﻮﺛﻴﻖ‪ :‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺧﺎﺩﻡ ﺗﻮﺛﻴﻖ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺛﻴﻖ‬ ‫‪ :Open‬ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻥ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻓﺘﺢ‬ ‫ﺑﻴﻦ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻭﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﻭﺻﻮﻝ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺧﺎﺩﻡ‪ .‬ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻳﺪﻳﻚ ﻳﺪﻋﻢ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻷﺧﻴﺮﺓ‪ ،‬ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺧﺎﺩﻡ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ :WPA2-PSK‬ﺗﻢ ﺇﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺃﻣﺎﻥ‬ ‫‪WPA2-PSK‬‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﺎﺩﺭﺓ ﻋﻦ ﻣﺴﺆﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‪a.‬‬ ‫‪ .WPA2‬ﻭﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ‪ AES‬ﻟﻠﺘﺸﻔﻴﺮ‪ .‬ﻭﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺄﺳﻴﺲ‬ ‫ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻣﻦ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻋﺮﺽ‪ ،‬ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﺒﻮﻃﺔ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻭﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ :WPA/WPA2-PSK‬ﻳﺘﺼﻞ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪WPA‬‬ ‫‪WPA/WPA2-PSK‬‬ ‫ﻭﻓ ًﻘﺎ ﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﺗﺗﻠﻜﻘﺎﻮﺋﻴًﻥﺎ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻲ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻔﻴﺮ‬ ‫ﻫﻲ ﻧﻔﺴﻬﺎ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺓ ﻣﺮﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ‬ ‫ﻣﺮﻭﺭ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺘﺄﻟﻒ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻨﻮﻋﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻷﻣﺎﻥ ‪ WPA2-PSK‬ﻭ ‪WPA/WPA2-‬‬ ‫‪ ،PSK‬ﻳﺤﺪﺩ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺓ ﻣﺮﻭﺭ ﻣﺸﺘﺮﻛﺔ ﻣﺴﺒﻘﺎ ﻭﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ‪ 8 - 32‬ﺣﺮ ًﻓﺎ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ \"ﺷﺒﻜﺔ\" ‪ -‬ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ \"ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪ LAN‬ﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ\"‬ ‫)ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺘﺼﻔﺢ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭﻳﺐ‪ :‬ﺗﺘﺄﻟﻒ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻭﺭ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻭﺭ ﻭﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‪ ، [Enter‬ﻳﺘﻢ‬ ‫ﺗﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪ LAN‬ﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻜﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﻭﺗُﻌِﺮﺽ ﻛﻌﻼﻣﺔ ﻧﺠﻤﻴﺔ )*(‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻨﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﻦ ‪ 8‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪63‬‬ ‫ﺣﺮﻓًﺎ(‬ ‫ﻧﻮﺻﻲ ﺑﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻭﺭ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺩﻭﺭﻱ ﻟﻸﻣﺎﻥ‪ ،‬ﻭﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﻧﻬﺎ ﺗﻌﻮﺩ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻭﺭ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻓﻔﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺳﺮﻳﻊ‪ ،‬ﻳﺤﺪﺩ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺗﺮﺩﺩ )ﻗﻨﺎﺓ( ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻣﺘﻪ‬ ‫‪1ch‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ‪.LAN‬‬ ‫‪6ch‬‬ ‫‪11ch‬‬

‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ‪ -‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ‪174‬‬ ‫{ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ < ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ < ﺇﺷﻌﺎﺭ‬ ‫{ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ < ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ < ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪ LAN‬ﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬ ‫ﺇﺧﻄﺎﺭ ﺑﺎﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ‬ ‫‪DHCP‬‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪IP‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺼﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺑﺮﻳﺪ ﺇﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ ﺇﻟﻰ‬ ‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫‪ :DHCP‬ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻋﻨﺎﻭﻳﻦ‬ ‫ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ‪IP‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﻭﻳﻦ ﺳﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﻣﺸﻜﻠﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺤﺬﻳﺮ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ‬ ‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﻣﻠﻘﻢ ‪SMTP‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ‪ IP‬ﻟﻠﺸﺒﻜﺔ‬ ‫ﻗﻨﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ‪IP‬‬ ‫ﻭﻗﻨﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ ﻭﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻮﺍﺑﺔ ﻳﺪﻭﻳﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻦ ‪0‬‬ ‫ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻮﺍﺑﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻔﺬ‬ ‫ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ 255‬ﺣﺮﻓﺎ ﻟﻜﻞ ﺣﻘﻞ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ‪ IP‬ﻟﺨﺎﺩﻡ ‪ SMTP‬ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ‪IP‬‬ ‫ﺗﺠﻨﺐ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﻭﻳﻦ‪ :‬ﻣﻦ ‪ 0.0.0.0‬ﺃﻭ ‪127.x.x.x‬‬ ‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫‪ 0‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ 255‬ﺣﺮﻓﺎ ﻟﻜﻞ ﺣﻘﻞ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﻮﺍﻥ ‪1‬‬ ‫ﺃﻭ ‪ 224.0.0.0‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪) 255.255.255.255‬ﺣﻴﺚ ﺗﻤﺜﻞ ‪x‬‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﻮﺍﻥ ‪2‬‬ ‫ﺗﺠﻨﺐ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﻭﻳﻦ‪ 127.x.x.x :‬ﺃﻭ ‪224.0.0.0‬‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﻮﺍﻥ ‪3‬‬ ‫ﻋﺪ ًﺩﺍ ﻳﺒﺪﺃ ﻣﻦ ‪ (0 - 255‬ﻟﻌﻨﻮﺍﻥ ‪ IP‬ﻭﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻮﺍﺑﺔ‬ ‫ﺇﻟﻰ ‪) 255.255.255.255‬ﺣﻴﺚ ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ‪ x‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻳﺒﺪﺃ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﻭ‪ 0.0.0.0‬ﻭ‪ 255.255.255.255‬ﻟﻘﻨﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 0‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪.(255‬‬ ‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﻫﻞ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ‪ IP‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ‪ 1‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ 25) 65535‬ﻫﻮ ﺣﺪﺩ ﺭﻗﻤﺎ ﻟﺮﻗﻢ ﻣﻨﻔﺬ ﺧﺎﺩﻡ ‪.SMTP‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ(‬ ‫ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ ﻟﻠﻤﺮﺳﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺣﺘﻰ ‪ 32‬ﺣﺮﻓًﺎ ﺃﺑﺠﺪﻳًﺎ ﺭﻗﻤ ًﻴﺎ‬ ‫ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺒﻴﻬﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﺩ‬ ‫ﺭﻗﻤ ًﻴﺎ‬ ‫ﺣﺘﻰ ‪ 64‬ﺣﺮ ًﻓﺎ ﺃﺑﺠﺪ ًﻳﺎ‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﻣﺘﺼﻔﺢ ﺍﻟﻮﻳﺐ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﻼﻣﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻭﻛﺮﺭ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﻭﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺜﻼﺛﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ \"ﺷﺒﻜﺔ\" ‪ -‬ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ \"ﺇﺷﻌﺎﺭ\"‬ ‫)ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻭﻑ \"‬ ‫) ( ‪[\\ ] < > ; : ,‬‬ ‫ﺗﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺇﺷﻌﺎﺭ ﺗﻠﻘﻲ ﺇﺧﻄﺎﺭ ﺑﺎﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻭﻗﻮﻉ ﻣﺸﻜﻠﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺤﺬﻳﺮ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻓﺎﺕ(‬

‫‪175‬‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ‪ -‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‬ ‫{ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ < ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ < ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬ ‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻟﻤﺮﺍﻗﺒﺔ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪.SNMP‬‬ ‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫‪SNMP‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺑﻮﺍﺑﺔ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ‪LAN‬‬ ‫ﺑﻮﺍﺑﺔ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ‬ ‫‪AMX Device‬‬ ‫ﻟﻤﺮﺍﻗﺒﺔ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪ ،‬ﺃﻧﺖ ﺑﺤﺎﺟﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻣﺪﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ‪1 Trap IP‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ‪ AMX Device Discovery‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ‬ ‫ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪ LAN‬ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ‬ ‫‪Discovery‬‬ ‫‪ SNMP‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪ .‬ﻳﻨﺒﻐﻲ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺑﺮﻭﺗﻮﻛﻮﻝ‬ ‫ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ‪2 Trap IP‬‬ ‫ﺗﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﻪ ﺑﺎﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫‪Crestron‬‬ ‫‪ SNMP‬ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﻣﺴﺆﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ‪IP‬‬ ‫‪RoomView‬‬ ‫ﻭﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ ﻫﻲ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻣﺮﺍﻗﺒﺔ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻴﻪ‬ ‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺣﺘﻰ ‪ 32‬ﺣﺮ ًﻓﺎ ﺃﺑﺠﺪﻳًﺎ ﺭﻗﻤﻴًﺎ‬ ‫ﻋﺒﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪.Crestron RoomView‬‬ ‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫‪Control4 SDDP‬‬ ‫ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﻣﺎ ﻳﺼﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﺛﻨﻴﻦ ﻣﻦ ﻋﻨﺎﻭﻳﻦ ‪ IP‬ﻻﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻝ ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻬﺎﺕ‬ ‫)ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﺴﺎﻓﺎﺕ ﻭﺃﻱ‬ ‫ﺇﺷﻌﺎﺭ ﻋﺒﺮ ‪PJLink‬‬ ‫‪ SNMP‬ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪ ًﻣﺎ ﻣﻦ ‪ 0‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ 255‬ﻟﻜﻞ ﺣﻘﻞ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺭﻣﻮﺯ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻏﻴﺮ @(‬ ‫ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ‪ IP‬ﺍﻟﻤﺒﻠﻎ ﺑﻪ‬ ‫ﻳﻌﻴﻖ ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ ‪ Crestron RoomView‬ﻣﻴﺰﺓ ‪Epson‬‬ ‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫‪Message‬‬ ‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫‪ Message Broadcasting‬ﻓﻲ ‪EasyMP‬‬ ‫‪Broadcasting‬‬ ‫ﺗﺠﻨﺐ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﻭﻳﻦ‪ 127.x.x.x :‬ﺃﻭ ‪224.0.0.0‬‬ ‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫‪.Monitor software‬‬ ‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺇﻟﻰ ‪) 255.255.255.255‬ﺣﻴﺚ ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ‪ x‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺭﻗﻢ ﻳﺒﺪﺃ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ‪IP‬‬ ‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﺿﺒﻄﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻟﻠﺴﻤﺎﺡ ﺑﺎﻟﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ‬ ‫‪ 0‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪.(255‬‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﺮﻭﺗﻮﻛﻮﻝ ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﺒﺴﻴﻂ )‪ (SDDP‬ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﻋ ﱢﻴﻦ ﺍﺳﻢ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ‪.SNMP‬‬ ‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫‪.Control4‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﱢﻦ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻹﺷﻌﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻋﺒﺮ ‪ PJLink‬ﺃﻭ ﻳﻌﻄﱢﻠﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻟﺘﻤﻜﻴﻦ ﻣﻴﺰﺓ ‪EPSON Message‬‬ ‫ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ‪ IP‬ﻟﺘﻠﻘﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ‬ ‫‪.Broadcasting‬‬ ‫ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺇﺷﻌﺎﺭﺍﺕ ‪ .PJLink‬ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﻭﻳﻦ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺃﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻨﺰﻳﻞ ‪ Message Broadcasting‬ﻭﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫‪ 0‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ 255‬ﻟﻜﻞ ﺣﻘﻞ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﻮﻳﺐ ﺍﻵﺗﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﻭﻳﻦ‪ 127.x.x.x :‬ﺃﻭ ‪ 224.0.0.0‬ﺇﻟﻰ‬ ‫‪http://www.epson.com/‬‬ ‫‪) 255.255.255.255‬ﺣﻴﺚ ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ‪ x‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺭﻗﻢ ﻳﺒﺪﺃ ﻣﻦ ‪0‬‬ ‫ﺇﻟﻰ ‪.(255‬‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ‪ -‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪) Others‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ(‬ ‫ﺗﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺑﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﻟﻠﺸﺒﻜﺔ‪.‬‬

‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ‪ -‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ‪176‬‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ‪ -‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ \"ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ\"‬ ‫ﺗﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺑﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻣﻦ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫{ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ < ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ < ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻧﻌﻢ ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻧﻌﻢ‬ ‫ﻻ‬

‫‪177‬‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ‪ -‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ \"‪\"ECO‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬ ‫ﺗﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ ECO‬ﻣﻦ ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﺘﻮﻓﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻣﺤﺴﻦ ﺍﻹﺿﺎﺀﺓ‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺗﻮﻓﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪ ،‬ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺃﻳﻘﻮﻧﺔ ﺗﺼﻔﺢ ﺑﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﻭﻓﻘًﺎ‬ ‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﻣﻦ ﺷﺄﻧﻪ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﻬﻼﻙ‬ ‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺧﻔﺾ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﻭﻓﻘًﺎ ﻟﻠﻤﺸﻬﺪ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺘﻢ‬ ‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺳﻜﻮﻥ‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺿﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻟﻜﻞ ﻭﺿﻌﻴﺔ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭﻗﺖ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺴﻜﻮﻥ‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ‪ 1 - 30‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﻮﻗﺖ ﻛﺘﻢ ﺻﻮﺕ‪/‬ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺼﺮ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ‪:‬‬ ‫• ﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﺳﺘﻬﻼﻙ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻋﺎﺩﻱ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻌﻴﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻌﺪﺍﺩ‬ ‫• ﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬ ‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ‬ ‫{ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ < ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ‬ ‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ‬ ‫• ﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺇﺳﻘﺎﻁ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫{ ﻣﻤﺘﺪ < ﺇﺳﻘﺎﻁ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩ < ﺇﺳﻘﺎﻁ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩ‬ ‫ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻓﺘﺮﺓ ﻣﻦ ﻗﻠﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻨﺸﺎﻁ‪) ،‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻄﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ(‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﺤﺪﺩ ﻓﺘﺮﺓ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺴﻜﻮﻥ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺠ‪V‬ﻬ‪/‬ﺎﺯ‪،A‬ﺗﻠﻘ)ﺎﻋﺋﻨﻴًﺎﺪﺑﺍﻟﻌﺪﻀﺒ‪0‬ﻂ‪3‬ﻋﻠﺩﻗﻰﻴﻘﻭﺔﺿﻓﻊﻲﺗﺸﺣﺎﻟﻐﻴﺔﻞ(‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬ ‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻛﺘﻢ ﺻﻮﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﻬﻼﻙ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬ ‫ﻳﺤﺪﺩ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ ﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻌﺬﺭ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ‬ ‫ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻣﺮﺍﻗﺒﺔ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻋﺒﺮ‬ ‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ ‪ECO‬‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺷﺎﻫﻖ ﺃﻭ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬ ‫ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻌﻴﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺪﺍﺩ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ‬ ‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ‬ ‫ﻣﻮﺍﻗﻊ ﻋﺮﺿﺔ ﻟﺪﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻋﺎﺩﻱ‬ ‫ﺑﺘﻤﻜﻴﻦ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻟﻠﺴﻤﺎﺡ ﺑﺤﺪﻭﺙ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ‬ ‫—‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺼﺮ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺇﺳﻘﺎﻁ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩ‬ ‫‪ECO‬‬ ‫ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻌﻴﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻌﺪﺍﺩ‪:‬‬ ‫‪* ECO2‬‬ ‫ﻣﻀﺒﻮ ًﻃﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻣﺮﺍﻗﺒﺔ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻴﻪ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ‬ ‫{ ﻣﻤﺘﺪ < ﺇﺳﻘﺎﻁ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩ < ﺇﺳﻘﺎﻁ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩ‬ ‫• ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪ :‬ﻳﻀﺒﻂ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻹﺩﺭﺍﻙ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺎﻟﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ) ﻣﺨﺮﺝ ‪ A/V‬ﺩﺍﺋﻤﺎ(‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻼﺯﻣﺔ ﻭﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﻭﻓ ًﻘﺎ ﻟﺬﻟﻚ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮﻓﻮﻥ ﻣﻦ ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺔ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ )ﻓﻘﻂ‬ ‫ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺼﺮ ﺇﻻ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺨﺮﺝ ‪ A/V‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﺩﺍﺋﻤﺎ(‬ ‫ﻣﻘﻠﻮﺏ ﺭﺃﺳ ًﻴﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫{ ﻣﻤﺘﺪ < ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪ < A/V‬ﻣﺨﺮﺝ ‪A/V‬‬ ‫ﻋﺎﺩﻱ‪ :‬ﻳﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ ﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﺃﻳﻘﻮﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻔﺢ ﺃﺳﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺮﻯ ﻟﻠﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ‬ ‫ﻟﺘﻮﺿﻴﺢ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﻮﻓﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻐﻴﺮ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ‪،‬‬ ‫‪ :ECO‬ﻳﻘﻠﻞ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﻭﺍﻟﻀﻮﺿﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﺟﻤﺔ ﻋﻦ‬ ‫)ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ(‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻭﺣﺔ ﻭﻳﻮﻓﺮ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻭﻳﻄﻴﻞ ﻋﻤﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﻀﺒﻂ ﻛﻞ ﻗﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺑﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ ECO‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺗﻬﺎ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ‪،‬‬ ‫‪ :ECO2‬ﻳﺨﻔﺾ ﺿﻮﺿﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻭﺣﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻗﻞ ﻣﻦ ‪.ECO‬‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺜﻨﺎﺀ ﻭﺿﻌﻴﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻌﺪﺍﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫* ﻳﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻟﻠﻄﺮﺍﺯ ‪.EB-695Wi/EB-685Wi/EB-685W/EB-680‬‬

‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ‪ -‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ \"‪178 \"ECO‬‬ ‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻭﻗﺖ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺴﻜﻮﻥ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻋﺘﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﻗﺼﻴﺮﺓ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺪﻭﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ‪a‬‬ ‫ﻭﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ y‬ﺍﺭﺗﺒﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺻﻠﺔ‬ ‫• \"ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ‪ -‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ \"ﻣﻤﺘﺪ\"\" ﺻـ‪167‬‬

‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻋﻦ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ‪ -‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ \"ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ\" ‪179‬‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ‪ -‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻋﻦ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻋﻦ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻭﺍﻹﺻﺪﺍﺭ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‪ .‬ﻭﻣﻊ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻌﺬﺭ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺃﻳﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻋﻦ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻭﻣﺼﺎﺩﺭ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﻓﺮﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ‪ .‬ﻻ ﻳﺴﺠﻞ ﻣﺆﻗﺖ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺃﻳﺔ ﺳﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻟﻢ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬ ‫ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺼﺮ‬ ‫ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻋﻦ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﺮ ‪ 10‬ﺳﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻗﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ‪a.‬‬ ‫ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﺇﺻﺪﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻹﺻﺪﺍﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬ ‫ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺼﺮ‬ ‫‪ y‬ﺍﺭﺗﺒﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺻﻠﺔ‬ ‫ﺳﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ‬ ‫• \"ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ‪ -‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻋﻦ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ\" ﺻـ‪179‬‬ ‫ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺳﺎﻋﺎﺕ )‪ (H‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻌﻲ ﺍﺳﺘﻬﻼﻙ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻋﺎﺩﻱ ﻭ‬ ‫‪ ، ECO‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺻﻔﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﺣﺼﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ ‪Epson‬‬ ‫ﻣﺼﺪﺭ‬ ‫ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﺃﺻﻠﻲ ﺑﺪﻳﻞ ﻗﺮﻳ ًﺒﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻔﺬ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺘﺼﻞ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ‬ ‫ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬ ‫ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻟﻤﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺚ‬ ‫ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﺩﻗﺔ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺰﺍﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﺻﻴﻐﺔ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻟﻤﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﻟﻤﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺤﺘﺎﺟﻬﺎ ﻓﻨﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ‪.‬‬

‫‪180‬‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻋﻦ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ‪ -‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ \"ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ\"‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺴﺒﺐ ﻭﺍﻟﺤﻠﻮﻝ‬ ‫ﺭﻣﺰ ‪Event ID‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬ ‫ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺼﺮ‬ ‫‪0893‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺗﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻔﻴﺮ ‪ ،TKIP/AES‬ﺍﺣﺮﺹ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺻﺤﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺃﻣﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‬ ‫‪0894‬‬ ‫ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻋﻦ ﻣﺸﻜﻼﺕ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺤﺘﺎﺟﻬﺎ ﻓﻨﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪0898‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺴﻠﺴﻞ‬ ‫ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﻠﺴﻠﻲ ﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬ ‫‪Event ID‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻗﻄﻊ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺮﺡ ﺑﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺍﺣﺮﺹ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻤﺴﺆﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪0899‬‬ ‫ﻓﺸﻞ ﺍﻟﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ .DHCP‬ﺍﺣﺮﺹ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺧﺎﺩﻡ ‪ DHCP‬ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ‬ ‫‪Event‬‬ ‫ﺭﻣﻮﺯ‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﺭﺍﺟﻊ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ؛‬ ‫ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﻟﻤﺸﻜﻠﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟ ُﻤﻨﺎﻇﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺤﺪﺙ‬ ‫ﻣﻌ ﱢﺮﻑ‬ ‫ﺭﻗﻢ‬ ‫ﻳﻌﺮﺽ‬ ‫‪.ID‬‬ ‫ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ‪ ،DHCP‬ﻳﺮﺟﻰ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ‪ DHCP‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬ ‫{ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ < ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ < ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ‪ < LAN‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪DHCP < IP‬‬ ‫‪ y‬ﺍﺭﺗﺒﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺻﻠﺔ‬ ‫ﺃﺧﻄﺎﺀ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬ ‫• \"ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺭﻣﻮﺯ ‪ \"Event ID‬ﺻـ‪180‬‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺭﻣﻮﺯ ‪Event ID‬‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ‪ Event ID‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ‪ ،‬ﻓﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺭﻣﻮﺯ ‪ Event ID‬ﻫﺬﻩ ﻟﺤﻞ‬ ‫ﻣﺸﻜﻠﺔ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺗﺒﻄﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺮﻣﺰ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻌﺬﺭ ﻋﻠﻴﻚ ﺣﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻜﻠﺔ‪ ,‬ﻳﺮﺟﻰ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻤﺴﺆﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺘﺒﻌﻪ ﺃﻭ ﺑﺄﺣﺪ ﻣﻮﻇﻔﻲ ﺍﻟﺪﻋﻢ ﺍﻟﻔﻨﻲ ﻟـ ‪.Epson‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺴﺒﺐ ﻭﺍﻟﺤﻠﻮﻝ‬ ‫ﺭﻣﺰ ‪Event ID‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺑﺪﺃ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺣﺮﺹ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺛﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻪ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬ ‫‪0432‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﻌﺬﺭ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻘﻮﻟﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺣﺮﺹ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪0435‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺛﺒﺎﺕ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻻﺕ‪ ،‬ﺍﺣﺮﺹ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻧﺘﻈﺮ ﺑﻀﻊ ﻟﺤﻈﺎﺕ‬ ‫‪0433‬‬ ‫ﺛﻢ ﺣﺎﻭﻝ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬ ‫‪0434‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺇﻧﻬﺎﺀ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺘﻮﻗﻊ‪ ،‬ﺍﺣﺮﺹ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﻗﻢ‬ ‫‪0481‬‬ ‫ﺑﺈﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺛﻢ ﺷﻐﻠﻪ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬ ‫‪0482‬‬ ‫‪0485‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻗﻄﻊ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﺣﺮﺹ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺧﻂﺃ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪ ،‬ﺍﺣﺮﺹ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺛﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻪ ﻣﺮﺓ‬ ‫‪0483‬‬ ‫‪04FE‬‬ ‫ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﺜﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﻭﺻﻮﻝ ﺗﺤﻤﻞ ﻧﻔﺲ ‪ .SSID‬ﺍﺣﺮﺹ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻭﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ‬ ‫‪0484‬‬ ‫ﻭﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﻔﺲ ‪.SSID‬‬ ‫‪0479‬‬ ‫ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺩﻗﺔ ‪ WPA/WPA2‬ﻻ ﻳﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ‪ .‬ﺍﺣﺮﺹ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺻﺤﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺃﻣﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‬ ‫‪04FF‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪0891‬‬ ‫‪0892‬‬

‫ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ‪ -‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ‪181‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻌﻈﻢ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﻴﻤﻬﺎ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻜﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺆﻗﺖ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺻﻔﺮ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ﺗﺼﻔﻴﺮ ﻋﺪﺩ‬ ‫ﺳﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﻋﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﺳﺘﺮﺟﺎﻉ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻨﻊ‪:‬‬ ‫• ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ‬ ‫• ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺗﺼﻐﻴﺮ‬ ‫• ﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫• ﺷﻌﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬ ‫• ﺍﺗﺴﺎﻕ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ‬ ‫• ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‬ ‫• ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ‬ ‫• ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‬ ‫• ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‬ ‫• ﺳﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ‬ ‫• ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻭﺭ‬

‫‪182‬‬ ‫ﻧﺴﺦ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ )ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺪﻓﻌﻲ(‬ ‫ﻭﺻﱢﻞ ﻣﺤﺮﻙ ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ ‪ USB‬ﻣﺤﻤﻮﻻً ﻓﺎﺭ ًﻏﺎ ﺑﻤﻨﻔﺬ ‪ USB-A‬ﻓﻲ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪b.‬‬ ‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﻨﺴﺦ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻃﺎﻟﻤﺎ ﺃﻧﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﺍﺯ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺣﺮﺹ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‪ [Esc‬ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺃﻭ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‪،‬‬ ‫• ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺤﺮﻙ ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ ‪ USB‬ﻣﺤﻤﻮﻝ‬ ‫ﺛﻢ ﻭﺻﻞ ﻛﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪c.‬‬ ‫• ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻋﺒﺮ ﻛﺒﻞ ‪USB‬‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﻣﺆﺷﺮﺍﺕ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻗﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺣﺮﺭ ﺯﺭ ]‪.[Esc‬‬ ‫• ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪.EasyMP Network Updater‬‬ ‫ﺗﺒﺪﺃ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮﺍﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﻣﻴﺾ ﻭﻳﺘﻢ ﻛﺘﺎﺑﺔ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺪﻓﻊ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺸﻐﻞ ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ ‪ ،USB‬ﻭﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻬﺎﺀ ﻣﻦ‪d‬‬ ‫ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻧﺴﺦ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺁﺧﺮ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺎﺑﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ‬ ‫• ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ )ﻣﺎ ﻋﺪﺍ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺇﺷﻌﺎﺭ ﻭﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ(‬ ‫ﻻ ﺗﻔﺼﻞ ﻛﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺸﻐﱢﻞ ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ ‪ USB‬ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻞ ﻟﻺﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﻛﺘﺎﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ‪ .‬ﻓﺈﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﻗﻄﻊ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ‬ ‫• ﺳﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﻭﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻛﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺸﻐﻞ ﻓﻼﺵ ‪ ،USB‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻗﻤﺼﻮﺖﺭﺓﺑﻪﻣﺜﻗﺒﻞﻞﺍ ﺇﻻﻧﺟﺤﺮﺍﺮﺍﺀ ﺇﻑ‪،‬ﻋﺪﻧﺍﻈﺩ ًﺮﺍﺍﻟ ﻟﺪﻨﻓﺴﻊﺦﻛﻤﻗﺎﻴﻢﻗﺪﺿﺗﺒﺘﻐﻂﻴ ﺍﺮﻟ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺸﺎﺭﺓﺷ ﺃﺔﻳﺍﻟﻀًﺎﻤﻌﻋﺮﻠﻭﻰﺿﺔﺟﻬﺍﺎﻟﺘﺯﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺪﻓﻊ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬ ‫ﺇﺟﺮﺍﺀ‬ ‫‪a‬‬ ‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻝ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ‬ ‫ﺁﺧﺮ‪,‬‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﻀﺒﻄﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺃﺧﺮﺝ ﻣﺸﻐﻞ ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﻓﻼﺵ ‪e.USB‬‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﻨﺴﺦ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺁﺧﺮ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﻧﺴﺦ ﺷﻌﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺗﺠﻨﺐ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻻ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﻣﺸﺎﺭﻛﺘﻬﺎ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺷﻌﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﺳﻢ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺪﻓﻊ ﻫﻮ ‪ .PJCONFDATA.bin‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﺳﻢ‬ ‫‪a‬‬ ‫ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻧﺺ ﺑﻌﺪ ‪ PJCONFDATA‬ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺭﻣﻮﺯ ﺃﺑﺠﺪﻳﺔ ﺭﻗﻤﻴﺔ‪.‬ﻓﻘﻂ‪ .‬ﻭﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ‬ ‫ﺑﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ‪ PJCONFDATA‬ﻻﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻌﺮﻑ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﻟﻦ ﺗﺘﺤﻤﻞ ‪ Epson‬ﻣﺴﺆﻭﻟﻴﺔ ﺃﻋﻄﺎﻝ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺪﻓﻊ ﻭﺗﻜﺎﻟﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻠﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺗﺒﻄﺔ ﺑﺴﺒﺐ ﺍﻧﻘﻄﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺧﻄﺎﺀ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺎﻛﻞ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻗﺪ ُﺗﺴﺒﺐ ﻣﺜﻞ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻷﻋﻄﺎﻝ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺳﻠﻴﻤﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ y‬ﺍﺭﺗﺒﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺻﻠﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﺣﺮﺹ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻓﺼﻞ ﻛﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻋﻦ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﻧﺴﺦ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﻨﻪ ﻭﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺇﻃﻔﺎﺀ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ‬ ‫• \"ﻧﻘﻞ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺤﺮﻙ ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ ‪ USB‬ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﻟﻺﺯﺍﻟﺔ\" ﺻـ‪182‬‬ ‫ﻣﺆﺷﺮﺍﺕ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪f.‬‬ ‫• \"ﻧﻘﻞ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﻦ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ\" ﺻـ‪183‬‬ ‫ﻭﺻﱢﻞ ﻣﺤﺮﻙ ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ ‪ USB‬ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺪﻓﻌﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻔﻮﻅ ﺑﻤﻨﻔﺬ ‪ USB-A‬ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﻧﻘﻞ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺤﺮﻙ ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ ‪ USB‬ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﻟﻺﺯﺍﻟﺔ‬ ‫ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪g.‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻧﺴﺦ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﻌﻴﻦ ﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺁﺧﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﺍﺯ ﻧﻔﺴﻪ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺸﻐﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ‪.USB‬‬ ‫ﺍﺣﺮﺹ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‪ [Menu‬ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺃﻭ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ‬ ‫ﻳﺠﺐ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﺸﻐﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ‪ USB‬ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ‪ FAT‬ﻭﻻ ﺗﺪﺭﺝ ﺃﻱ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺃﻣﺎﻥ‪ .‬ﺍﺣﺬﻑ ﺃﻳﺔ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ‪a‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻐﻞ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺪﻓﻊ ﻭﺇﻻ ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺣﺮﺹ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻛﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪h.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻓﺼﻞ ﺳﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪ ،‬ﻭﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺇﻏﻼﻕ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮﺍﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ‪a.‬‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﻣﺆﺷﺮﺍﺕ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻗﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺣﺮﺭ ﺯﺭ ]‪) .[Menu‬ﺣﻴﺚ ﺗﻈﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮﺍﺕ ﻣﻀﺎﺀﺓ‬ ‫ﻟﺤﻮﺍﻟﻲ ‪ 75‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ‪i(.‬‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺒﺪﺃ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮﺍﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﻣﻴﺾ‪ ،‬ﺗﺘﻢ ﻛﺘﺎﺑﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪ .‬ﻭﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻬﺎﺀ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺎﺑﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬

‫‪183‬‬ ‫ﻧﺴﺦ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ )ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺪﻓﻌﻲ(‬ ‫ﺍﺣﺮﺹ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ‪ (USB) Windows‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﺳﺤﺐ ﺭﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻞ ﻟﻺﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺳﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﻤﻼﺕ‬ ‫ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ‬ ‫)‪f.(OS X‬‬ ‫ﻻ ﺗﻔﺼﻞ ﻛﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺸﻐﱢﻞ ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ ‪ USB‬ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻞ ﻟﻺﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﻛﺘﺎﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ‪ .‬ﻓﺈﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﻗﻄﻊ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﺍﺣﺮﺹ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻓﺼﻞ ﻛﺒﻞ ‪g.USB‬‬ ‫ﻛﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻐﻞ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺃﺧﺮﺝ ﻣﺸﻐﻞ ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﻓﻼﺵ ‪j.USB‬‬ ‫ﺍﺣﺮﺹ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻓﺼﻞ ﻛﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻋﻦ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﻧﺴﺦ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﻨﻪ ﻭﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺇﻃﻔﺎﺀ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ‬ ‫ﻧﻘﻞ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﻦ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬ ‫ﻣﺆﺷﺮﺍﺕ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪h.‬‬ ‫ﻭ ﱢﺻﻞ ﻛﺒﻞ ‪ USB‬ﺑﻤﻨﻔﺬ ‪ USB‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻭﺑﻤﻨﻔﺬ ‪ USB-B‬ﻓﻲ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪i.‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻧﺴﺦ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﻌﻴﻦ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺁﺧﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﺍﺯ ﻧﻔﺴﻪ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬ ‫ﻭﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺑﻜﺎﺑﻞ ‪.USB‬‬ ‫ﺍﺣﺮﺹ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‪ [Menu‬ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺃﻭ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺪﻓﻊ ﻫﺬﻩ ﻣﻊ ﺇﺻﺪﺍﺭﺍﺕ ﺃﻧﻈﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪:‬‬ ‫‪a‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺣﺮﺹ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻛﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪j.‬‬ ‫• ﺇﺻﺪﺍﺭ ‪ Windows Vista‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﺣﺪﺙ‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﻣﺆﺷﺮﺍﺕ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻗﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺣﺮﺭ ﺯﺭ ]‪k.[Menu‬‬ ‫• ﺇﺻﺪﺍﺭ ‪ OS X 10.7.x‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﺣﺪﺙ‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻌﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻛﻘﺮﺹ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﻟﻺﺯﺍﻟﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻓﺼﻞ ﺳﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪ ،‬ﻭﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺇﻏﻼﻕ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮﺍﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ‪a.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺣﺮﺹ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﺴﺦ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺪﻓﻊ )‪ (PJCONFDATA.bin‬ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺤﻔﻈﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬ ‫ﻭﺻﱢﻞ ﻛﺒﻞ ‪ USB‬ﺑﻤﻨﻔﺬ ‪ USB‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻭﺑﻤﻨﻔﺬ ‪ USB-B‬ﻓﻲ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪b.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺣﺮﺹ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‪ [Esc‬ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺃﻭ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‪c،‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ ﻋﺎﻟﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻞ ﻟﻺﺯﺍﻟﺔ‪l.‬‬ ‫ﺛﻢ ﻭﺻﻞ ﻛﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺠﻨﺐ ﻧﺴﺦ ﺃﻳﺔ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺠﻠﺪﺍﺕ ﺑﺨﻼﻑ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺪﻓﻊ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻞ ﻟﻺﺯﺍﻟﺔ‪a.‬‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﻣﺆﺷﺮﺍﺕ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻗﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺣﺮﺭ ﺯﺭ ]‪d.[Esc‬‬ ‫ﺍﺣﺮﺹ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ‪ (USB) Windows‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﺳﺤﺐ ﺭﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻞ ﻟﻺﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺳﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﻤﻼﺕ‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻌﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻛﻘﺮﺹ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﻟﻺﺯﺍﻟﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫)‪m.(OS X‬‬ ‫ﺍﺣﺮﺹ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻓﺘﺢ ﺭﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻞ ﻟﻺﺯﺍﻟﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ ﻭﺃﺣﻔﻆ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺪﻓﻊ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪e.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺣﺮﺹ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻓﺼﻞ ﻛﺒﻞ ‪n.USB‬‬ ‫ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﺳﻢ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺪﻓﻊ ﻫﻮ ‪ .PJCONFDATA.bin‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﺳﻢ‬ ‫‪a‬‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺒﺪﺃ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮﺍﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﻣﻴﺾ‪ ،‬ﺗﺘﻢ ﻛﺘﺎﺑﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪ .‬ﻭﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻬﺎﺀ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺎﺑﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻧﺺ ﺑﻌﺪ ‪ PJCONFDATA‬ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺭﻣﻮﺯ ﺃﺑﺠﺪﻳﺔ ﺭﻗﻤﻴﺔ‪.‬ﻓﻘﻂ‪ .‬ﻭﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ‪ PJCONFDATA‬ﻻﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻌﺮﻑ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ‬ ‫ﺳﻠﻴﻤﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻻ ﺗﻔﺼﻞ ﺳﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﻛﺘﺎﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﻓﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻚ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻻ ﻳﺒﺪﺃ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ‬ ‫ﺻﺤﻴﺢ‪.‬‬

‫ﻧﺴﺦ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ )ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺪﻓﻌﻲ( ‪184‬‬ ‫‪ y‬ﺍﺭﺗﺒﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺻﻠﺔ‬ ‫• \"ﺇﺧﻄﺎﺭ ﺧﻂﺃ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺪﻓﻊ\" ﺻـ‪184‬‬ ‫ﺇﺧﻄﺎﺭ ﺧﻂﺃ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺪﻓﻊ‬ ‫ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺑﺈﺧﻄﺎﺭﻙ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻭﻗﻮﻉ ﺧﻂﺃ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺪﻓﻊ‪ .‬ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺤﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻜﻠﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺤﻞ‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ‬ ‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺪﻓﻌﻲ ﺗﺎﻟ ًﻔﺎ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﺤﺮﻙ ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ ‪ USB‬ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻮﻝ ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ﻛﺒﻞ ‪ USB‬ﻣﻮﺻﱠﻼً ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻓﺼﻞ ﻣﺤﺮﻙ ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ ‪ USB‬ﺃﻭ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪ ،USB‬ﻭﺍﻓﺼﻞ ﺳﻠﻚ ﻃﺎﻗﺔ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺛﻢ‬ ‫ﻭﺻﱢﻠﻪ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪ ،‬ﻭﺃﻋﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺎﻭﻟﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ‪ :‬ﺑﺮﺗﻘﺎﻟﻲ ‪ -‬ﻭﻣﻴﺾ ﺳﺮﻳﻊ‬ ‫• ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ‪ :‬ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ‪ :‬ﺑﺮﺗﻘﺎﻟﻲ ‪-‬‬ ‫ﻭﻣﻴﺾ ﺳﺮﻳﻊ‬ ‫ﺭﺑﻤﺎ ﻓﺸﻠﺖ ﻛﺘﺎﺑﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﻭﺭﺑﻤﺎ ﺣﺪﺙ ﺧﻂﺃ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻮﻗﻒ ﻋﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪ ،‬ﻭﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﻗﺎﺑﺲ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺄﺧﺬ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭﻳﺮﺟﻰ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑـ ‪.Epson‬‬ ‫• ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ‪ :‬ﺃﺯﺭﻕ ‪ -‬ﻭﻣﻴﺾ ﺳﺮﻳﻊ‬ ‫• ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ‪ :‬ﺃﺯﺭﻕ ‪ -‬ﻭﻣﻴﺾ ﺳﺮﻳﻊ‬ ‫• ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ‪ :‬ﺑﺮﺗﻘﺎﻟﻲ ‪ -‬ﻭﻣﻴﺾ ﺳﺮﻳﻊ‬ ‫• ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ‪ :‬ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ‪ :‬ﺑﺮﺗﻘﺎﻟﻲ ‪-‬‬ ‫ﻭﻣﻴﺾ ﺳﺮﻳﻊ‬

‫ﺻﻴﺎﻧﺔ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﻗﺪ ﺗﺤﺘﺎﺝ ﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺩﻭﺭﻱ ﻭﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﻣﺮﺷﺢ ﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍﺀ ﻭﻓﺘﺤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍﺀ ﻟﻤﻨﻊ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺑﺴﺒﺐ ﻣﻨﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻬﻮﻳﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺟﺰﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﻴﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻼﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻝ ﻫﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﻭﻣﺮﺷﺢ ﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍﺀ ﻭﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻭﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﻠﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﻋﻠﻲ ﻭﺳﻨﻪ‪ .‬ﺍﺗﺼﻞ ﺑـ ‪ Epson‬ﺃﻭ ﺑـ ‪ Epson‬ﻟﻠﺼﻴﺎﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺘﻤﺪﺓ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﺃﺟﺰﺍﺀً ﺑﺤﺎﺟﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻝ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺬﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺃﻱ ﺟﺰﺀ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﺰﺍﺀ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭﻗﻒ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻪ ﻭﺍﻓﺼﻞ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳُﺤﻈﺮ ﻓﺘﺢ ﺃﻱ ﻏﻄﺎﺀ ﻓﻲ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺜﻨﺎﺀ ﻣﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﺒﻴﻦ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪًﺍ‪ ،‬ﺣﻴﺚ ﻗﺪ ﺗﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﻟﺘﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻴﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻓﻲ ﺇﻳﺬﺍﺋﻚ ﺑﺸﺪﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ y‬ﺍﺭﺗﺒﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺻﻠﺔ‬ ‫• \"ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﻧﺎﻓﺬﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ\" ﺻـ‪186‬‬ ‫• \"ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﻣﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺍﺋﻖ\" ﺻـ‪187‬‬ ‫• \"ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺣﺎﻭﻳﺔ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ\" ﺻـ‪188‬‬ ‫• \"ﺻﻴﺎﻧﺔ ﻣﺮﺷﺢ ﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍﺀ ﻭﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻬﻮﻳﺔ\" ﺻـ‪189‬‬ ‫• \"ﺻﻴﺎﻧﺔ ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ\" ﺻـ‪193‬‬ ‫• \"ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻝ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ\" ﺻـ‪198‬‬ ‫• \"ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻝ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻠﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﻋﻠﻲ\" ﺻـ‪199‬‬ ‫• \"ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻝ ﺳﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﻠﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﻋﻠﻲ\" ﺻـ‪200‬‬

‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﻧﺎﻓﺬﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ‪186‬‬ ‫ﻧ ّﻈﻒ ﻧﺎﻓﺬﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺑﺎﻧﺘﻈﺎﻡ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻌﺮﺿﻬﺎ ﻟﻼﺗﺴﺎﺥ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺮﺍﻛﻢ ﺍﻷﺗﺮﺑﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﻄﺤﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻹﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻷﺗﺮﺑﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﻭﺳﺎﺥ؛ ﺍﻣﺴﺢ ﻧﺎﻓﺬﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺑﺮﻓﻖ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺭﻕ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺎﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺬﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﺗﺠﻨﺐ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻨﻈﻒ ﻋﺪﺳﺎﺕ ﻳﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻏﺎﺯﺍﺕ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻼﺷﺘﻌﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﻓﺮﺑﻤﺎ ﺗﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺗﻔﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﺎﺩﺭﺓ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻓﻲ ﻧﺸﻮﺏ ﺣﺮﻳﻖ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ‬ ‫ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻨﻈﻒ ﺯﺟﺎﺝ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻳﺔ ﻣﻮﺍﺩ ﺧﺸﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻤﺲ ﻓﻲ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﻧﺎﻓﺬﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪ ،‬ﻭﺗﺠﻨﺐ ﺃﻳ ًﻀﺎ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﻧﺎﻓﺬﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻷﻳﺔ ﺻﺪﻣﺎﺕ؛‬ ‫ﻭﺇﻻ ﺗﻌﺮﺿﺖ ﻟﻠﺘﻠﻒ‪.‬‬

‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﻣﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺍﺋﻖ ‪187‬‬ ‫ﻧﻈﱢﻒ ﺯﺟﺎﺝ ﻣﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺍﺋﻖ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺑﺎﻧﺘﻈﺎﻡ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻇﻬﺮﺕ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﻄﻠﺐ ﻣﻨﻚ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺃﻱ ﻋﻮﺍﺋﻖ ﺗﺘﺨﻠﻞ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ‪ .‬ﻹﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻷﺗﺮﺑﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﻭﺳﺎﺥ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻤﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺑﺮﻓﻖ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺭﻕ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺎﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺬﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻨﻈﻒ ﻋﺪﺳﺎﺕ ﻳﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻏﺎﺯﺍﺕ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻼﺷﺘﻌﺎﻝ ﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﻣﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺍﺋﻖ‪ .‬ﻓﺮﺑﻤﺎ ﺗﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺗﻔﻌﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﺎﺩﺭﺓ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻓﻲ ﻧﺸﻮﺏ ﺣﺮﻳﻖ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ‬ ‫ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻨﻈﻒ ﺯﺟﺎﺝ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻮﺍﺩ ﺧﺸﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻤﺲ ﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﻣﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺍﺋﻖ‪ ،‬ﻭﺗﺠﻨﺐ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﻣﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺍﺋﻖ ﻷﻳﺔ ﺻﺪﻣﺎﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺗﻠﻒ ﺟﺰﺀ ﻣﻦ ﺳﻄﺢ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺃﻋﻄﺎﻝ‪.‬‬

‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺣﺎﻭﻳﺔ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ‪188‬‬ ‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺣﺎﻭﻳﺔ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻭﺍﻓﺼﻞ ﻛﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻹﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻷﺗﺮﺑﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﻭﺳﺎﺥ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻗﻄﻌﺔ ﻗﻤﺎﺵ ﻧﺎﻋﻤﺔ ﻭﺟﺎﻓﺔ ﻭﺧﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﺑﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻹﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻷﻭﺳﺎﺥ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﻴﺪﺓ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻗﻄﻌﺔ ﻗﻤﺎﺵ ﻧﺎﻋﻤﺔ ﻭﻣُﺒﻠﻠﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﺎﺀ ﻭﺍﻟﺼﺎﺑﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﻔﻒ‪ ،‬ﻭﺗﺠﻨﺐ ﺭﺵ ﺃﻳﺔ ﺳﻮﺍﺋﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮ ًﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ‬ ‫ﺗﺠﻨﺐ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺸﻤﻊ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻜﺤﻮﻝ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﺰﻳﻦ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻣﺨﻔﻒ ﺍﻟﺪﻫﺎﻥ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﻳﺔ ﻣﻮﺍﺩ ﻛﻴﻤﻴﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻓﻲ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺣﺎﻭﻳﺔ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪ ،‬ﺇﺫ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻠﻔﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻭﺗﺠﻨﺐ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﺨﺎﺥ ﻫﻮﺍﺀ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻏﺎﺯﺍﺕ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺘﺮﻙ ﻣﺨﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻼﺷﺘﻌﺎﻝ‪.‬‬

‫ﺻﻴﺎﻧﺔ ﻣﺮﺷﺢ ﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍﺀ ﻭﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻬﻮﻳﺔ ‪189‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺤﺐ ﻣﺰِﻻﺝ ﻏﻄﺎﺀ ﻣﺮﺷﺢ ﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍﺀ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻓﺘﺢ ﻏﻄﺎﺀﻩ‪b.‬‬ ‫ُﺗﻌﺪ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻴﺎﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﻈﻤﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺮﺷﺢ ﻣﻬﻤﺔ ﻟﻠﺤﻔﺎﻅ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪ ،‬ﻧﻈِﻒ ﻣﺮﺷﺢ ﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍﺀ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ‬ ‫ﻛﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﻗﻞ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‬ ‫ﺑﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻷﺟﺰﺍﺀ ﻣﺮﺓ‬ ‫ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻌﺪﻻﺗﻬﺎ‪ُ ،‬ﻳﻮﺻﻰ‬ ‫ﺗﻨﺒﻬﻚ ﺑﺄﻥ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻗﺪ ﻭﺻﻠﺖ ﺇﻟﻰ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﺑﻴﺔ ﺑﺸﺪﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﺛﻼﺛﺔ ﺷﻬﻮﺭ‪ .‬ﻓﻘﻢ ﺑﺘﻨﻈﻴﻔﻬﺎ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺃﻛﺒﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﺗﺘﻢ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻴﺎﻧﺔ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻨﺘﻈﻢ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﻘﻮﻡ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺑﺈﺧﻄﺎﺭﻙ ﺑﺄﻥ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻗﺪ ﻭﺻﻠﺖ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﻋﺎﻟﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭﻻ ﺗﻨﺘﻈﺮ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺣﻴﺚ ﺇﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﺪﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺗﻔﻌﺔ ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺍﺕ ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺷﺄﻧﻪ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻘﻠﻞ ﻣﻦ ﻋﻤﺮ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ y‬ﺍﺭﺗﺒﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺻﻠﺔ‬ ‫• \"ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﻣﺮﺷﺢ ﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍﺀ\" ﺻـ‪189‬‬ ‫• \"ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻝ ﻣﺮﺷﺢ ﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍﺀ\" ﺻـ‪190‬‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﻣﺮﺷﺢ ﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍﺀ‬ ‫ﻧ ﱢﻈﻒ ﻣﺮﺷﺢ ﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍﺀ ﻓﻲ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻋﻠﻘﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺃﺗﺮﺑﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻇﻬﺮﺕ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﻄﻠﺐ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻔﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻭﺍﻧﺰﻉ ﻛﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪a.‬‬

‫‪190‬‬ ‫ﺻﻴﺎﻧﺔ ﻣﺮﺷﺢ ﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍﺀ ﻭﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻬﻮﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﻓﻼ ﺗﻐﻤﺮ ﻣﺮﺷﺢ ﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍﺀ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﺀ ﻭﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺃﻳﺔ ﻣﻄﻬﺮﺍﺕ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺬﻳﺒﺎﺕ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ‪a.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺤﺐ ﻣﺮﺷﺢ ﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍﺀ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪c.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ‬ ‫ﺗﺠﻨﺐ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﺨﺎﺥ ﻫﻮﺍﺀ‪ ،‬ﻓﺮﺑﻤﺎ ﺗﺘﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﺯﺍﺕ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻼﺷﺘﻌﺎﻝ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺪﻓﻊ ﺑﺎﻷﺗﺮﺑﺔ ﻭﺑﻘﺎﻳﺎ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﻠﻔﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﻋﺪﺳﺎﺕ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻛﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﺴﺎﺳﺔ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺃﻋﺪ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻣﺮﺷﺢ ﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍﺀ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﻮﺿﺢ ﻭﺍﺩﻓﻌﻪ ﺑﺮﻓﻖ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﺴﻤﻊ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﺳﺘﻘﺮﺍﺭﻩ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﻣﻜﺎﻧﻪ‪e.‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻷﺗﺮﺑﺔ ﺑﺮﻓﻖ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻜﻨﺴﺔ ﺻﻐﻴﺮﺓ ﻣﺨﺼﺼﺔ ﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺃﻭ ﻓﺮﺷﺎﺓ ﻧﺎﻋﻤﺔ ﻟﻠﻐﺎﻳﺔ )ﻣﺜﻞ ﻓﺮﺷﺎﺓ‪d‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺪﻫﺎﻥ(‪.‬‬ ‫ﺃﻏﻠﻖ ﻏﻄﺎﺀ ﻣﺮﺷﺢ ﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍﺀ‪f.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻝ ﻣﺮﺷﺢ ﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍﺀ‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻝ ﻣﺮﺷﺢ ﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍﺀ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪:‬‬ ‫• ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺑﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﻣﺮﺷﺢ ﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍﺀ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻟﻪ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻔﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻣﺮﺷﺢ ﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍﺀ ﻣﻤﺰﻕ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺎﻟ ٌﻒ‬

‫ﺻﻴﺎﻧﺔ ﻣﺮﺷﺢ ﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍﺀ ﻭﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻬﻮﻳﺔ ‪191‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺤﺐ ﻣﺮﺷﺢ ﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍﺀ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪c.‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻝ ﻣﺮﺷﺢ ﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍﺀ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻖ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺑﺎﻟﺴﻘﻒ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻭﺿﻌﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣِﻨْ َﻀ َﺪﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻭﺍﻧﺰﻉ ﻛﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪a.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺤﺐ ﻣﺰِﻻﺝ ﻏﻄﺎﺀ ﻣﺮﺷﺢ ﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍﺀ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻓﺘﺢ ﻏﻄﺎﺀﻩ‪b.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺨﻠﺺ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺮﺷﺤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻌﻤﻠﺔ ﻭﻓﻘ ًﺎ ﻟﻠﻮﺍﺋﺢ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻠﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪a‬‬ ‫• ﻫﻴﻜﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺷﺢ‪ :‬ﺑﻮﻟﻲ ﺑﺮﻭﺑﻠﻴﻦ‬ ‫• ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺷﺢ‪ :‬ﺑﻮﻟﻲ ﺑﺮﻭﺑﻠﻴﻦ‬

‫ﺻﻴﺎﻧﺔ ﻣﺮﺷﺢ ﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍﺀ ﻭﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻬﻮﻳﺔ ‪192‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻣﺮﺷﺢ ﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍﺀ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﻮﺿﺢ ﻭﺍﺩﻓﻌﻪ ﻗﻠﻴﻼً ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﺴﺘﻘﺮ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻜﺎﻧﻪ‪d.‬‬ ‫ﺃﻏﻠﻖ ﻏﻄﺎﺀ ﻣﺮﺷﺢ ﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍﺀ‪e.‬‬ ‫‪ y‬ﺍﺭﺗﺒﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺻﻠﺔ‬ ‫• \"ﻗﻄﻊ ﺍﻟﻐﻴﺎﺭ\" ﺻـ‪220‬‬

‫ﺻﻴﺎﻧﺔ ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ‪193‬‬ ‫ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ‬ ‫ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺴﺘﻬﻠﻜﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ‪ ،‬ﻭﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﻓﻲ ﺃﺳﺮﻉ ﻭﻗﺖ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺤﺪﺙ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‪:‬‬ ‫• ﻳﺰﻳﺪ ﺍﺣﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻧﻔﺠﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻣﺘﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻪ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻧﻘﻀﺎﺀ ﻓﺘﺮﺓ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻝ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ‪،‬‬ ‫• ﺗﺼﺒﺢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﺃﻏﻤﻖ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻘﻞ ﺟﻮﺩﺗﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺑﺂﺧﺮ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﻓﻲ ﺃﺳﺮﻉ ﻭﻗﺖ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ‪ ،‬ﺣﺘﻰ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻻ ﻳﺰﺍﻝ ﺻﺎﻟﺤًﺎ ﻟﻠﻌﻤﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ُﺗﺨﺒﺮﻙ ﺑﻀﺮﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ )ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻗﺒﻞ ‪ 100‬ﺳﺎﻋﺔ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﻋﻤﺮ‬ ‫ﻳﻘﺼﺮ‬ ‫ﺃﻥ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ‬ ‫ﺗﻜﺮﺍ ًﺭﺍ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﺟﻬﺎﺯ‬ ‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﻭﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬ ‫ﻓﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﻣﺘﻜﺮﺭ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺑﺸﻜﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻠﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﻭﺗﻘﻢ‬ ‫ﻻ ﺗﻔﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺔ ﻋﻤﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﻗﻊ ﻭﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ‪ 30‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ(‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺑﻴﺢ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻳﻮﻣﺾ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﻃﺎﻗﺔ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﻕ ﻭﻳﻮﻣﺾ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺣﻪ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺗﻘﺎﻟﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻗﺪ ﻳﺼﺒﺢ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺩﺍﻛ ًﻨﺎ ﺃﻭ ﻳﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﻗﺒﻞ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺒﻴﻪ‪ ،‬ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﻳﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺧﺼﺎﺋﺺ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﻭﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ‬ ‫ﺗﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻪ ﺑﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻳﺠﺐ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻔﺎﻅ ﺩﻭ ًﻣﺎ ﺑﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﻴﺔ ﺟﺎﻫﺰﺓ ﻟﻼﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻟﺤﻴﻦ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻴﺎﺝ ﺇﻟﻴﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻧﻮﺻﻲ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺼﺎﺑﻴﺢ ‪ Epson‬ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺛﺮ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺑﻴﺢ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻭﺍﻷﻣﺎﻥ‪ .‬ﻻ‬ ‫ﻳﻐﻄﻲ ﺿﻤﺎﻥ ‪ Epson‬ﺃﻱ ﺗﻠﻒ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻄﻞ ﻧﺎﺗﺞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺼﺎﺑﻴﺢ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺃﺻﻠﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ y‬ﺍﺭﺗﺒﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺻﻠﺔ‬ ‫• \"ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ\" ﺻـ‪193‬‬ ‫• \"ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺆﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ\" ﺻـ‪196‬‬ ‫• \"ﻣﻮﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ\" ﺻـ‪225‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ‬ ‫ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻃﺎﻭﻟﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻘﻪ ﺑﺎﻟﺴﻘﻒ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺬﻳﺮ‬ ‫• ﺩﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﻳﺒﺮﺩ ﺗﻤﺎ ًﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻟﻪ ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﻟﺘﺠﻨﺐ ﺍﻹﺻﺎﺑﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺃﻳُﻭﺤﻈﺣﺮﺪﺗﻭﻔﺙﻜﻴﺻﻚﺪﺍﻟﻣﻤﺔﺼﻛﺒﺎﻬﺮﺡﺑﺎﺃﺋﻴﻭﺔﺗﺃﻌﻭﺪﻳﻭﻠﻗﻪ‪.‬ﻮﻉﻓﺈﺇﺫﺍﺻﺎﺗﺑﺎﻢ ﺗﺕ‪.‬ﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ ُﻣ َﻌﺪَﻝ ﺃﻭ ﻣُ َﻔﻜَﻚ ﻓﻲ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻧﺸﻮﺏ ﺣﺮﻳﻖ‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻭﺍﻧﺰﻉ ﻛﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪a.‬‬ ‫ﺩﻉ ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻳﺒﺮﺩ ﻟﺤﻮﺍﻟﻲ ﺳﺎﻋﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻗﻞ‪b.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻔﻚ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻏﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﻓﻚ ﺍﻟﺒُ ْﺮﻏِ ّﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺤﻜﻢ ﺭﺑﻂ ﻏﻄﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ‪c.‬‬

‫ﺻﻴﺎﻧﺔ ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ‪194‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺤﺐ ﻏﻄﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﻟﻔﺘﺤﻪ‪d.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺬﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻟﻠﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻨﻜﺴﺮ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻟﻪ‪ ،‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻝ ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﻟﺠﺪﺍﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺑﺎﻟﺴﻘﻒ‪ ،‬ﻳﻨﺒﻐﻲ‬ ‫ﻏﻄﺎﺀ‬ ‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﺎﻧﺐ ﻏﻄﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﻭﻟﻴﺲ ﺗﺤﺘﻪ‪ .‬ﺃﺯﻝ‬ ‫ﻳﺠﺐ ﻋﻠﻴﻚ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﻮﻑ‬ ‫ﺍﻧﻜﺴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ‪ ،‬ﻛﻤﺎ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻋﻠﻤﻴﺼﻚﺒﺎﺩﺍﺡﺋﺑﻤًﺎﺮﻓﺍﻓﻖﺘ‪.‬ﺮﺍﻛﺽﻦ‬ ‫ﺩﺧﻠﺖ‬ ‫ﺗﺴﻘﻂ ﻛﺴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺰﺟﺎﺝ ﻭﺗﺴﺒﺐ ﺍﻹﺻﺎﺑﺔ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺣﻴﺚ ﺭﺑﻤﺎ‬ ‫ﺣﺬﺭ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﻏﻄﺎﺀ‬ ‫ﺷﻈﺎﻳﺎ ﺍﻟﺰﺟﺎﺝ ﻓﻲ ﻋﻴﻨﻚ ﺃﻭ ﻓﻤﻚ‪ ،‬ﺍﺗﺼﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻄﺒﻴﺐ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻔﻚ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻏﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺜﺒﺖ ﻏﻄﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪ ،‬ﻭﻻ ﺗﺨﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻏﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ‪e.‬‬

‫‪195‬‬ ‫ﺻﻴﺎﻧﺔ ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻳﺪ ﻓﻲ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺑﺮﻓﻖ‪ ،‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺑﺴﻬﻮﻟﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺘﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻧﻚ ﻗﺪ‬ ‫ﺍﻣﺴﻚ ﺣﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﻭﺍﺳﺤﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺑﺤﺮﺹ‪f.‬‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻌﺘﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺢ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺑﻌﺪﻫﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺒﺾ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ‪g.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ‬ ‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻻﺣﻈﺖ ﺷﺮ ًﺧﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻓﻜﻪ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﻟﻪ ﺑﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺗﺼﻞ ﺑـ ‪ Epson‬ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫‪a‬‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺎﻋﺪﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺠﻨﺐ ﻟﻤﺲ ﺍﻷﺟﺰﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﺰﺟﺎﺟﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺑﻴﺢ ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﻟﺘﺠﻨﺐ ﺍﺣﺘﺮﺍﻕ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺃﻭﺍﻧﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻳﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ )ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺑﻴﺢ( ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺰﺋﺒﻖ )‪ ،(Hg‬ﻓﺎﻃّﻠﻊ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺍﺋﺢ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﻧﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﻠﻘﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺨﻠﺺ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﻔﺎﻳﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﻭﻻ ﺗﻀﻌﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺳﻠﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻬﻤﻼﺕ‪.‬‬

‫‪196‬‬ ‫ﺻﻴﺎﻧﺔ ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬ ‫• ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻏﻄﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺑﺄﻣﺎﻥ؛ ﻭﺇﻻ‪ ،‬ﻓﻠﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺩﻓﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺑﻘﻮﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻞ ﻭﺃﺣﻜﻢ ﺭﺑﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻏﻲ ﻟﺘﺜﺒﻴﺘﻪ‪h.‬‬ ‫• ﻳﺮﺟﻰ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻝ ﻏﻄﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺑﻘﻮﺓ ﻣﻔﺮﻃﺔ ﻭﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺗﺸﻮﻫﻪ‪a.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﻝ ﻏﻄﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﻭﺃﺣﻜﻢ ﺭﺑﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻏﻲ ﻟﺘﺜﺒﻴﻪ‪i.‬‬ ‫ﺃﻋﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺻﻔﺮ ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﻟﻤﺮﺍﻗﺒﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻳﺪ ﻟﻠﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ y‬ﺍﺭﺗﺒﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺻﻠﺔ‬ ‫• \"ﻗﻄﻊ ﺍﻟﻐﻴﺎﺭ\" ﺻـ‪220‬‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺆﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ‬ ‫ﻳﻨﺒﻐﻲ ﻋﻠﻴﻚ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺆﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻝ ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﺒﻴﺎﻥ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﻭﻟﻤﺮﺍﻗﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ‬ ‫ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺻﺤﻴﺤﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺠﻨﺐ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺆﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﻟﺘﺠﻨﺐ ﺗﻠﻘﻲ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ‬ ‫ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‪a.‬‬ ‫ﺷﻐﱢﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪a.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ]‪ [Menu‬ﻓﻲ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺃﻭ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‪b.‬‬ ‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪c.[Enter‬‬

‫ﺻﻴﺎﻧﺔ ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ‪197‬‬ ‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺗﺼﻔﻴﺮ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺳﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﻋﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪d.[Enter‬‬ ‫ﺳﻴﻈﻬﺮ ﻟﻚ ﻃﻠﺐ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻣﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺳﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﻧﻌﻢ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪e.[Enter‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ [Menu‬ﺃﻭ ]‪ [Esc‬ﻟﻠﺨﺮﻭﺝ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ‪f.‬‬

‫‪198‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻝ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺬﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺘﻲ ﻣﻨﺠﻨﻴﺰ ‪ AA‬ﺃﻭ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺘﻴﻦ ﻗﻠﻮﻳﺘﻴﻦ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺣﺮﺹ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺘﻴﻦ ﻓﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﻧﻔﺎﺫﻫﻤﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻮﺍﺿﻊ ﻋﻼﻣﺘﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﺐ )‪ (+‬ﻭﺍﻟﺴﺎﻟﺐ )‪ (-‬ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺣﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ‬ ‫ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ‬ ‫ﺻﺤﻴﺢ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ‪ ،‬ﻓﻤﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻨﻔﺠﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺘﺴﺮﺏ ﻭﺗﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ ﻧﺸﻮﺏ ﺣﺮﻳﻖ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺍﺣﺮﺹ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﺮﺍﺀﺓ ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻥ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺃﻭ ﺇﺻﺎﺑﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺗﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺃﺯِﻝ ﻏﻄﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﻮﺿﺢ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﻜﻞ‪a.‬‬ ‫ﺃﻋﺪ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻏﻄﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﺴﻤﻊ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﺳﺘﻘﺮﺍﺭﻩ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻜﺎﻧﻪ‪d.‬‬ ‫ﺃﺧﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺘﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺪﻳﻤﺘﻴﻦ‪b.‬‬ ‫ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻓﺎﻥ ‪ +‬ﻭ – ﻣﺘﻮﺍﺟﻬﻴﻦ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﻮﺿﺢ‪c.‬‬

‫‪199‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻝ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻠﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﻋﻠﻲ‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺬﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﻠﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﻋﻠﻲ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﻨﺠﻨﻴﺰ ﻣﻘﺎﺱ ‪ AA‬ﺃﻭ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻗﻠﻮﻳﺔ ﻣﻘﺎﺱ ‪ AA‬ﺃﻭ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ‪) Eneloop‬ﻃﺮﺍﺯ ‪BK-‬‬ ‫‪ (3MCC‬ﻗﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ‪ .‬ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻓﻮﺭ ﻧﻔﺎﺩ ﻃﺎﻗﺘﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻮﺍﺿﻊ ﻋﻼﻣﺘﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﺐ )‪ (+‬ﻭﺍﻟﺴﺎﻟﺐ )‪ (-‬ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺣﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﺗﺠﺎﻩ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺢ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﺗﻨﻔﺠﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺘﺴﺮﺏ ﻭﺗﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ ﻧﺸﻮﺏ ﺣﺮﻳﻖ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺇﺻﺎﺑﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻨﺨﻔﺾ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﻃﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﻮﻣﺾ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﻠﻢ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻟﻘﻠﻢ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻨﻄﻒﺉ‬ ‫ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﻠﻢ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻧﻔﺎﺩ ﻃﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ‬ ‫ﺃﻋﺪ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻏﻄﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﺴﻤﻊ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﺳﺘﻘﺮﺍﺭﻩ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻜﺎﻧﻪ‪d.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺣﺮﺹ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﺮﺍﺀﺓ ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻥ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺃ ِﺯﻝ ﻏﻄﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﻮﺿﺢ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﻜﻞ‪a.‬‬ ‫ﺃﺧﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺪﻳﻤﺔ‪b.‬‬ ‫ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻓﺎﻥ ‪ +‬ﻭ – ﻣﺘﻮﺍﺟﻬﻴﻦ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﻮﺿﺢ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﻜﻞ‪c.‬‬

‫ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻝ ﺳﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﻠﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﻋﻠﻲ ‪200‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺤﺐ ﺍﻟﺴﻦ ﺍﻟﻠﻴﻦ ﻟﻠﺨﺎﺭﺝ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ‪b.‬‬ ‫ﻳﺄﺗﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻠﻤﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﻋﻠﻴﺎﻥ ﻣﻊ ﻧﻮﻋﻴﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺳﻨﺎﻥ ﺍﻷﻗﻼﻡ‪ ،‬ﺃﺳﻨﺎﻥ ﻟﻴﻨﺔ ﻭﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺻﻠﺒﺔ‪ .‬ﺍﻷﺳﻨﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻴﻨﺔ ﻣﺮ ﱠﻛﺒﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﻗﻼﻡ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ‬ ‫ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺳ ًﻨﺎ ﺟﺪﻳ ًﺪﺍ‪c.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻳﺼﺒﺢ ﺍﻟﺴﻦ ﺍﻟﻠﻴﻦ ﺃﻗﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﺠﺎﺑﺔ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﻻﺗﺴﺎﺥ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻠﻒ‪ .‬ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﻟﻪ ﺑﺴﻦ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺮﻓﻖ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﺻﻌُﺐ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺴﻦ ﺍﻟﻠﻴﻦ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﻄﺢ ﻧﺴﻴﺠﻲ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺳﺘﺒﺪﻟﻪ ﺑﺴﻦ ﺻﻠﺐ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺴﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻠﺐ ﻟﻼﻫﺘﺮﺍﺀ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻒ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺳﺘﺒﺪﻟﻪ ﺑﺂﺧﺮ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ‪a.‬‬ ‫‪ y‬ﺍﺭﺗﺒﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺻﻠﺔ‬ ‫• \"ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻝ ﺳﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﻠﻢ ﺍﻟﻠﻴﻦ\" ﺻـ‪200‬‬ ‫• \"ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻝ ﺳﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﻠﻢ ﺍﻟﻠﻴﻦ ﺑﺴﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﻠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻠﺐ\" ﺻـ‪201‬‬ ‫• \"ﻟﻠﻤﻴﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﻋﻠﻴﺔ\" ﺻـ‪219‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻝ ﺳﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﻠﻢ ﺍﻟﻠﻴﻦ‬ ‫ﻟﻒ ﺳﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﻠﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﻋﻠﻲ ﻟﻔﻜﻪ‪a.‬‬ ‫ﻟﻒ ﺳﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﻠﻢ ﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺒﻪ‪d.‬‬